El PDF

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM GI
SECTION EL MA
EM
LC
EC
CONTENTS FE
PRECAUTIONS ...............................................................6 Trouble Diagnoses.....................................................83

CL
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ″AIR Bulb Replacement .....................................................83
BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″...............6 Aiming Adjustment .....................................................84 MT
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis.....................6 HEADLAMP - HEADLAMP AIMING CONTROL -........85
HARNESS CONNECTOR................................................7 Wiring Diagram - H/AIM -/Sedan for Europe ............85
Description ...................................................................7 Wiring Diagram - H/AIM -/For China and Israel........86 AT
STANDARDIZED RELAY................................................9 Wiring Diagram - H/AIM -/Hatchback ........................87
Description ...................................................................9 PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS .....................89
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING.........................................11 Wiring Diagram - TAIL/L -/Except for Europe............89
AX
Schematic/Sedan.......................................................11 Wiring Diagram - TAIL/L -/Sedan for Europe ............91
Wiring Diagram - POWER -/Sedan With Wiring Diagram - TAIL/L -/Hatchback........................93 SU
Gasoline Engine ........................................................12 STOP LAMP ..................................................................95
Wiring Diagram - POWER -/Sedan With Diesel Wiring Diagram - STOP/L -/Sedan ............................95
Engine........................................................................20 Wiring Diagram - STOP/L -/Hatchback .....................96 BR
Schematic/Hatchback ................................................28 BACK-UP LAMP............................................................97
Wiring Diagram - POWER -/Hatchback ....................30 Wiring Diagram - BACK/L -/Except for Europe .........97
Inspection...................................................................40 Wiring Diagram - BACK/L -/Sedan for Europe..........98 ST
GROUND........................................................................41 Wiring Diagram - BACK/L -/Hatchback .....................99
Ground Distribution....................................................41 FRONT FOG LAMP.....................................................100
RS
COMBINATION SWITCH ..............................................59 Wiring Diagram - F/FOG -/Except for Europe,
Check/Sedan .............................................................59 China and Israel ......................................................100
Check/Hatchback.......................................................61 Wiring Diagram - F/FOG -/Sedan for Europe, BT
Replacement..............................................................62 China and Israel ......................................................101
STEERING SWITCH......................................................63 Wiring Diagram - F/FOG -/Hatchback .....................102
Check.........................................................................63 Bulb Replacement ...................................................103 HA
HEADLAMP ...................................................................64 Aiming Adjustment ...................................................104
Wiring Diagram - H/LAMP -/Sedan Except for REAR FOG LAMP .......................................................105
Europe .......................................................................64 Wiring Diagram - R/FOG -/Sedan ...........................105
SC
Wiring Diagram - H/LAMP -/Hatchback.....................67 Wiring Diagram - R/FOG -/Hatchback.....................108
Wiring Diagram - H/LAMP -/Sedan for Europe .........68 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS ...109
Trouble Diagnoses.....................................................70 System Description/Sedan ......................................109
Bulb Replacement .....................................................71 Schematic/Sedan..................................................... 111
Aiming Adjustment .....................................................72 Wiring Diagram - TURN -/Sedan Except for IDX
HEADLAMP - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM - .................74 Europe .....................................................................112
System Description....................................................74 Wiring Diagram - TURN -/Sedan for Europe ..........115
Schematic/Sedan.......................................................75 Trouble Diagnoses/Sedan .......................................117
Wiring Diagram - DTRL -/Sedan ...............................76 Electrical Components Inspection ...........................117
Schematic/Hatchback ................................................79 System Description/Hatchback................................118
Wiring Diagram - DTRL -/Hatchback.........................80 Wiring Diagram - TURN -/Hatchback ......................119
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
Trouble Diagnoses/Hatchback.................................121 Component Parts and Harness Connector
ILLUMINATION............................................................122 Location/Sedan ........................................................185
Schematic/Sedan.....................................................122 System Description/Sedan ......................................185
Wiring Diagram - ILL -/Sedan Except for Europe ...123 Combination Meter/Sedan With Tachometer for
Wiring Diagram - ILL -/Sedan for Europe................126 Bulb Type.................................................................187
Schematic/Hatchback ..............................................128 Schematic/Sedan With Tachometer for Bulb Type..188
Wiring Diagram - ILL -/Hatchback ...........................129 Combination Meter/Sedan With Tachometer for
Wiring Diagram - ILL -/New Sedan Except for LED Type .................................................................189
Europe .....................................................................132 Schematic/Sedan With Tachometer for LED Type ..190
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP.............................................135 Combination Meter/Without Tachometer .................191
System Description/With Multi-remote Control Schematic/Without Tachometer ...............................192
System Except for Europe.......................................135 Construction/Sedan for Bulb Type...........................193
Wiring Diagram - ROOM/L -/With Multi-remote Construction/Sedan for LED Type...........................193
Control System Except for Europe..........................137 Wiring Diagram - METER -/Sedan With
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure/With Multi- Tachometer Except for Europe................................194
remote Control System Except for Europe .............139 Wiring Diagram - METER -/Without Tachometer ....195
CONSULT-II Application Items/With Multi-remote Wiring Diagram - METER -/Sedan for Europe........196
Control System Except for Europe..........................140 Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/Trip Meter
Trouble Diagnoses/With Multi-remote Control Segment Check in Diagnosis Mode/Sedan.............197
System Except for Europe.......................................141 Trouble Diagnoses/Sedan .......................................198
System Description/With Interior Room Lamp Electrical Components Inspection/Sedan................206
Timer and Without Multi-remote Control System Component Parts and Harness Connector
Except for Europe....................................................149 Location/Hatchback .................................................208
Wiring Diagram - ROOM/L -/With Interior Lamp System Description/Hatchback................................208
Timer and Without Multi-remote Control System Combination Meter/Hatchback ................................210
Except for Europe....................................................151 Schematic/Hatchback ..............................................211
Trouble Diagnoses/With Interior Room Lamp Construction/Hatchback...........................................212
Timer and Without Multi-remote Control System Wiring Diagram - METER -/Hatchback ...................213
Except for Europe....................................................153 Combination Meter Self-Diagnosis/Hatchback ........215
System Description/Sedan With Interior Room Trouble Diagnoses/Hatchback.................................218
Lamp Timer for Europe............................................159 Electrical Components Inspection/Hatchback .........225
Wiring Diagram - ROOM/L -/Sedan With Interior WARNING LAMPS ......................................................226
Room Lamp Timer For Europe................................161 Schematic/Bulb Type for Sedan ..............................226
Trouble Diagnoses/Sedan With Interior Room Wiring Diagram - WARN -/Bulb Type for Sedan
Lamp Timer for Europe............................................163 With Tachometer Except for Europe .......................227
System Description/Hatchback With Interior Wiring Diagram - WARN -/Bulb Type for Sedan
Room Lamp Timer ...................................................169 Without Tachometer Except for Europe ..................231
Wiring Diagram - ROOM/L -/Hatchback With Wiring Diagram - WARN -/Sedan for Europe..........234
Interior Room Lamp Timer.......................................171 Schematic/Hatchback ..............................................238
Trouble Diagnoses/Hatchback With Interior Wiring Diagram - WARN -/Hatchback .....................239
Room Lamp Timer ...................................................173 Schematic/LED Type for Sedan Except for
Wiring Diagram - ROOM/L -/Sedan Without Europe .....................................................................243
Timer ........................................................................180 Wiring Diagram - WARN -/LED Type for Sedan
Wiring Diagram - ROOM/L -/Hatchback Without Except for Europe....................................................244
Timer ........................................................................181 Electrical Components Inspection ...........................248
SPOT AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS ...........................182 A/T INDICATOR...........................................................249
Wiring Diagram - INT/L -/Sedan Except for Wiring Diagram - AT/IND -/With Tachometer...........249
Europe .....................................................................182 Wiring Diagram - AT/IND -/Without Tachometer......250
Wiring Diagram - INT/L -/Sedan for Europe............183 WARNING CHIME .......................................................251
Wiring Diagram - INT/L -/Hatchback .......................184 Component Parts and Harness Connector
METERS AND GAUGES.............................................185 Location/Except for Europe .....................................251
EL-2
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
System Description/With Multi-remote Control Wiring Diagram - CLOCK -/Sedan Except for GI
System Except for Europe.......................................251 Europe .....................................................................311
Wiring Diagram - CHIME -/With Multi-remote Wiring Diagram - CLOCK -/Sedan for Europe ........312
Control System Except for Europe..........................253 Wiring Diagram - CLOCK -/Hatchback....................313 MA
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure/With Multi- REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER.....................................314
remote Control System Except for Europe .............255 System Description/With Multi-remote Control
CONSULT-II Application Items/With Multi-remote System Except for Europe.......................................314
EM
Control System Except for Europe..........................256 Wiring Diagram - DEF -/With Multi-remote
Trouble Diagnoses/With Multi-remote Control Control System Except for Europe..........................315 LC
System Except for Europe.......................................256 CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure/With Multi-
System Description/Without Multi-remote Control remote Control System Except for Europe .............319
System Except for Europe.......................................262 CONSULT-II Application Items/With Multi-remote EC
Wiring Diagram - CHIME -/Without Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe..........................320
Control System Except for Europe..........................264 Trouble Diagnoses/With Multi-remote Control
Trouble Diagnoses/Without Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe.......................................321 FE
System Except for Europe.......................................266 System Description/Without Multi-remote Control
Component Parts and Harness Connector System Except for Europe.......................................325 CL
Location/Sedan for Europe......................................270 Wiring Diagram - DEF -/Without Multi-remote
System Description/Sedan for Europe ....................270 Control System Except for Europe..........................326
Wiring Diagram - CHIME -/Sedan for Europe.........272 Trouble Diagnoses/Without Multi-remote Control MT
Trouble Diagnoses/Sedan for Europe .....................273 System Except for Europe.......................................330
Component Parts and Harness Connector System Description/Sedan for Europe ....................333
Location/Hatchback .................................................278 Wiring Diagram - DEF -/Sedan for Europe .............335 AT
System Description/Hatchback................................279 Trouble Diagnoses/Sedan for Europe .....................339
Wiring Diagram - CHIME -/Hatchback ....................280 System Description/Hatchback................................342
AX
Trouble Diagnoses/Hatchback.................................282 Wiring Diagram - DEF -/Hatchback.........................343
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER ..................................288 Trouble Diagnoses/Hatchback.................................345
System Description/Sedan ......................................288 Electrical Components Inspection ...........................347 SU
Wiring Diagram - WIPER -/Sedan...........................290 Filament Check........................................................349
System Description/Hatchback................................291 Filament Repair .......................................................350
Wiring Diagram - WIPER -/Hatchback ....................293 AUDIO ..........................................................................351 BR
Removal and Installation .........................................295 System Description/Except for Europe....................351
Washer Nozzle Adjustment .....................................296 Wiring Diagram - AUDIO -/Except for Europe.........352
Washer Tube Layout ...............................................297 Trouble Diagnoses/Except for Europe.....................356
ST
REAR WIPER AND WASHER ....................................298 System Description/Sedan for Europe ....................357
Wiring Diagram - WIP/R -/Sedan ............................298 Schematic/Sedan for Europe...................................359 RS
Wiring Diagram - WIP/R -/Hatchback......................300 Wiring Diagram - AUDIO -/Sedan for Europe .........360
Removal and Installation .........................................302 System Description/Hatchback for Europe..............368
Washer Nozzle Adjustment .....................................302 Schematic/Hatchback ..............................................370 BT
Washer Tube Layout ...............................................303 Wiring Diagram - AUDIO -/Hatchback.....................371
HEADLAMP WASHER ................................................304 Trouble Diagnoses/For Europe................................379
Wiring Diagram - HLC -/Sedan ...............................304 Inspection.................................................................380 HA
Wiring Diagram - HLC -/Hatchback.........................305 AUDIO ANTENNA .......................................................381
Washer Tube Layout ...............................................306 Wiring Diagram - P/ANT - .......................................381
SC
HORN ...........................................................................307 Location of Antenna/Power Antenna .......................382
Wiring Diagram - HORN -/Sedan ............................307 Antenna Rod Replacement/Power Antenna............382
Wiring Diagram - HORN -/Hatchback .....................308 Window Antenna Repair ..........................................383
CIGARETTE LIGHTER................................................309 Location of Antenna/Sedan With Manual Antenna..385
Wiring Diagram - CIGAR -/Sedan ...........................309 Antenna Rod Replacement/Sedan With Manual
Wiring Diagram - CIGAR -/Hatchback.....................310 Antenna....................................................................385 IDX
CLOCK.........................................................................311 Location of Antenna/Hatchback...............................386
Antenna Rod Replacement/Hatchback ...................386
EL-3
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
HEATED SEAT ............................................................387 Wiring Diagram - D/LOCK -/Hatchback...................454
Wiring Diagram - H/SEAT -/Sedan ..........................387 Trouble Diagnoses/Hatchback.................................461
Wiring Diagram - H/SEAT -/Hatchback ...................389 System Description/Sedan for Europe ....................469
POWER SUNROOF.....................................................391 Schematic/Sedan for Europe...................................470
Wiring Diagram - SROOF - .....................................391 Wiring Diagram - D/LOCK -/Sedan for Europe .......471
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................392 Trouble Diagnoses/Sedan for Europe .....................476
DOOR MIRROR ...........................................................393 POWER DOOR LOCK - SUPER LOCK -...................484
Wiring Diagram - MIRROR -/LHD Models Except System Description..................................................484
for Europe ................................................................393 Schematic/Sedan.....................................................486
Wiring Diagram - MIRROR -/RHD Models Except Wiring Diagram - S/LOCK -/Sedan .........................487
for Europe ................................................................395 Trouble Diagnoses/Sedan .......................................493
Wiring Diagram - MIRROR -/Sedan for Europe......397 Schematic/Hatchback ..............................................506
Wiring Diagram - MIRROR -/Hatchback .................398 Wiring Diagram - S/LOCK -/Hatchback...................508
TRUNK LID OPENER..................................................400 Trouble Diagnoses/Hatchback.................................515
Wiring Diagram - TLID - ..........................................400 MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM .......................528
POWER WINDOW .......................................................401 Component Parts and Harness Connector
System Description/Except for Europe....................401 Location/Except for Europe .....................................528
Schematic/Except for Europe ..................................403 System Description/Except for Europe....................528
Wiring Diagram - WINDOW -/LHD Models Schematic/Except for Europe ..................................531
Except for Europe....................................................404 Wiring Diagram - MULTI -/Except for Europe .........532
Wiring Diagram - WINDOW -/RHD Models CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure/Except for
Except for Europe....................................................408 Europe .....................................................................535
Trouble Diagnoses/Except for Europe.....................412 CONSULT-II Application Items/Except for Europe ..536
System Description/Sedan for Europe ....................413 Trouble Diagnoses/Except for Europe.....................536
Schematic/Sedan for Europe...................................415 ID Code Entry Procedure/Except for Europe ..........550
Wiring Diagram - WINDOW -/Sedan for Europe.....416 Remote Controller Battery Replacement/Except
Trouble Diagnoses/Sedan for Europe .....................420 for Europe ................................................................554
System Description/Hatchback................................421 System Description/Sedan for Europe ....................555
Schematic/Hatchback ..............................................423 Wiring Diagram - MULTI -/Sedan for Europe..........556
Wiring Diagram - WINDOW -/Hatchback ................424 Trouble Diagnoses/Sedan For Europe ....................558
Trouble Diagnoses/Hatchback.................................428 ID Code Entry Procedure/Sedan for Europe...........564
POWER DOOR LOCK.................................................429 Remote Controller Battery Replacement/Sedan
Component Parts and Harness Connector for Europe ................................................................565
Location/Except for Europe .....................................429 System Description/Hatchbck..................................565
System Description/With Multi-remote Control Wiring Diagram - MULTI -/Hatchback .....................567
System Except for Europe.......................................429 Trouble Diagnoses/Hatchback.................................569
Wiring Diagram - D/LOCK -/With Multi-remote ID Code Entry Procedure/Hatchback ......................573
Control System Except for Europe..........................431 Remote Controller Battery
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure/With Multi- Replacement/Hatchback..........................................574
remote Control System Except for Europe .............433 THEFT WARNING SYSTEM .......................................575
CONSULT-II Application Items/With Multi-remote Component Parts and Harness Connector
Control System Except for Europe..........................434 Location ...................................................................575
Trouble Diagnoses/With Multi-remote Control System Description..................................................576
System Except for Europe.......................................435 Schematic ................................................................579
System Description/Without Multi-remote Control Wiring Diagram - THEFT -.......................................580
System Except for Europe.......................................443 CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure..........................585
Wiring Diagram - D/LOCK -/Without Multi-remote CONSULT-II Application Item ..................................586
Control System Except for Europe..........................444 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................587
Trouble Diagnoses/Without Multi-remote Control SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT .......................606
System Except for Europe.......................................446 Description ...............................................................606
System Description/Hatchback................................449 CONSULT-II .............................................................607
Schematic/Hatchback ..............................................452 Schematic ................................................................610
EL-4
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
Smart Entrance Control Unit Inspection Table ........612 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................694 GI
TIME CONTROL UNIT ................................................613 This Condition Is Not Abnormal...............................700
Description/Sedan Except for Europe .....................613 Program Loading .....................................................709
Schematic/Sedan Except for Europe ......................614 ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION...............................710 MA
Time Control Unit Inspection Table/Sedan Except Engine Compartment...............................................710
for Europe ................................................................615 Passenger Compartment/LHD Models....................712
Description/Sedan for Europe .................................616 Passenger Compartment/RHD Models ...................714
EM
Schematic/Sedan for Europe...................................617 HARNESS LAYOUT ....................................................716
Time Control Unit Inspection Table/Sedan for How to Read Harness Layout .................................716 LC
Europe .....................................................................618 Outline/Sedan ..........................................................717
Description/Hatchback .............................................619 Outline/Hatchback....................................................719
Trouble Diagnoses/Hatchback.................................619 Main Harness/Except for Europe ............................722 EC
Schematic/Hatchback ..............................................622 Main Harness/Sedan for Europe .............................726
NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM).....................624 Main Harness/Hatchback.........................................730
Component Parts and Harness Connetor Engine Room Harness/Sedan .................................734 FE
Location ...................................................................624 Engine Room Harness/Hatchback ..........................740
System Description..................................................625 Engine Control Harness/QG Engine Models...........744 CL
System Composition................................................626 Engine Control Harness/QG13 M/T Models with
Wiring Diagram - NATS -/Sedan For Europe..........627 Catalyst Converter for the Middle East (Up to
Wiring Diagram - NATS -/Hatchback.......................629 2002 Model Year) ....................................................748 MT
Wiring Diagram - NATS -/For Australia and the Engine Control Harness/QG13 Engine Models
Middle East ..............................................................630 with Catalyst Converter for the Middle East
CONSULT-II .............................................................631 (From 2003 Model Year)..........................................750 AT
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................634 Engine Control Harness/YD Engine Models ...........752
How to Replace NATS IMMU..................................651 Body Harness/Sedan...............................................756
AX
NAVIGATION SYSTEM ...............................................652 Body Harness/Hatchback ........................................764
Precautions ..............................................................652 Room Lamp Harness...............................................768
Component Parts Location ......................................653 Front Door Harness/LHD Models ............................769 SU
System Description..................................................654 Front Door Harness/RHD Models ...........................772
Schematic ................................................................662 Rear Door Harness/Except for Europe ...................775
Wiring Diagram - NAVI -..........................................663 Rear Door Harness/For Europe ..............................777 BR
Self-diagnosis Mode ................................................669 Back Door Harness .................................................779
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode ...............................672 BULB SPECIFICATIONS ............................................780
Control Panel Mode.................................................684 Headlamp.................................................................780
ST
Guide Volume Setting..............................................691 Exterior Lamp ..........................................................780
Anti-theft System .....................................................692 Interior Lamp............................................................780 RS
CONSULT-II .............................................................693 WIRING DIAGRAM CODES (CELL CODES).............781
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-5
PRECAUTIONS
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR

BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” NJEL0001
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. The SRS system composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL N16 is as follows (The compo-
sition varies according to the destination and optional equipment.):
I For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steer-
ing wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), front seat
belt pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
I For a side collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of front side air bag module (located in the outer side of front
seat), side air bag (satellite) sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal
collision), wiring harness, warning lamp (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
I To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance should be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
I Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the RS section.
I Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. Spiral cable and wiring harnesses covered with yellow insulation tape either just
before the harness connectors or for the complete harness are related to the SRS.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis NJEL0002
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
I Refer to GI-12, “HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS”
I Refer to EL-11, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING” for power distribution circuit
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
I Refer to GI-33, “HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUP IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS”
I Refer to GI-22, “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”
Check for any Service bulletins before servicing the vehicle.
EL-6
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
Description NJEL0003
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
I The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
NJEL0003S01
GI
I The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the
illustration below. MA
Refer to the next page for description of the slide-locking type connector.
CAUTION:
Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. EM
[Example]
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEL769DA IDX
EL-7
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description (Cont’d)
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) =NJEL0003S02
I A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those
related to OBD.
I The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnec-
tion.
I The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustra-
tion below.
CAUTION:
I Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
I Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
SEL769V
EL-8
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS
Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
NJEL0004S01
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SEL881H
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS NJEL0004S02

AT
1M 1 Make 2M 2 Make
1T 1 Transfer 1M·1B 1 Make 1 Break AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEL882H
IDX
EL-9
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description (Cont’d)
GEL264
EL-10
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Schematic/Sedan
Schematic/Sedan NJEL0005
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to “GROUND DISTRIBUTION”, EL-41.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
GEL318A
EL-11
Wiring Diagram — POWER —/Sedan With Gasoline Engine
Wiring Diagram — POWER —/Sedan With

Gasoline Engine NJEL0006
BATTERY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ANY POSITION NJEL0006S01
GEL319A
EL-12
Wiring Diagram — POWER —/Sedan With Gasoline Engine (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
GEL320A
EL-13
GEL321A
EL-14
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
GEL322A
EL-15
ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN “ACC” OR “ON” NJEL0006S02
GEL323A
EL-16
IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN “ON” AND/OR “START” NJEL0006S03
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
GEL324A
EL-17
GEL351A
EL-18
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
GEL352A
EL-19
Wiring Diagram — POWER —/Sedan With Diesel Engine
Wiring Diagram — POWER —/Sedan With

Diesel Engine NJEL0313
HEL452B
EL-20
Wiring Diagram — POWER —/Sedan With Diesel Engine (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL358B
EL-21
HEL359B
EL-22
ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN “ACC” OR “ON” NJEL0313S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL360B
EL-23
HEL361B
EL-24
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL362B
EL-25
HEL016B
EL-26
NOTE:
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-27
Schematic/Hatchback
Schematic/Hatchback NJEL0418
MEL960L
EL-28
Schematic/Hatchback (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL961L
EL-29
Wiring Diagram — POWER —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — POWER —/Hatchback NJEL0419

MEL962L
EL-30
Wiring Diagram — POWER —/Hatchback (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL963L
EL-31
MEL964L
EL-32
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL965L
EL-33
MEL966L
EL-34
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL967L
EL-35
ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SWITCH IN “ACC” OR “ON” NJEL0419S04
MEL968L
EL-36
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL969L
EL-37
MEL970L
EL-38
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL971L
EL-39
Inspection
Inspection NJEL0007
FUSE NJEL0007S01
I If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem
before installing new fuse.
I Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than
specified rating.
I Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse
holder properly.
I Remove fuse for “ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)” if vehicle is
not used for a long period of time.
CEL083
FUSIBLE LINK NJEL0007S02

A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or
by feeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuit
tester or test lamp.
CAUTION:
I If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit
(power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted.
In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of
problem.
I Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. Impor-
SEL165W tant: Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness,
vinyl or rubber parts.
CIRCUIT BREAKER NJEL0007S03

For example, when current is 30A, the circuit is broken within 8 to
20 seconds.
SBF284E
CIRCUIT BREAKER (PTC THERMISTOR TYPE) NJEL0007S04

The PTC thermister generates heat in response to current flow.
The temperature (and resistance) of the thermister element varies
with current flow. Excessive current flow will cause the element’s
temperature to rise. When the temperature reaches a specified
level, the electrical resistance will rise sharply to control the circuit
current.
Reduced current flow will cause the element to cool. Resistance
falls accordingly and normal circuit current flow is allowed to
resume.
SEL109W
EL-40
GROUND
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution NJEL0008

MAIN HARNESS NJEL0008S01
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL435B
EL-41
GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)
HEL839B
EL-42
GROUND
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL840B
EL-43
GROUND
HEL841B
EL-44
GROUND
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL503B
EL-45
GROUND
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS NJEL0008S02
HEL842B
EL-46
GROUND
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL843B
EL-47
GROUND
HEL164B
EL-48
GROUND
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL442B
EL-49
GROUND
ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/QG ENGINE MODELS NJEL0008S03
HEL504B
EL-50
GROUND
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL111B
EL-51
GROUND
ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/YD ENGINE MODELS EXCEPT FOR EUROPE NJEL0008S07
HEL994A
EL-52
GROUND
ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/YD ENGINE MODELS FOR EUROPE NJEL0008S09
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL444B
EL-53
GROUND
BODY HARNESS/SEDAN NJEL0008S04
HEL459B
EL-54
GROUND
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL844B
EL-55
GROUND
BODY HARNESS/HATCHBACK NJEL0008S10
HEL166B
EL-56
GROUND
BACK DOOR HARNESS NJEL0008S11
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL167B
EL-57
GROUND
ROOM LAMP AND REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER HARNESS NJEL0008S08
HEL165B
EL-58
COMBINATION SWITCH
Check/Sedan
Check/Sedan NJEL0009
RHD MODELS FOR EUROPE AND LHD MODELS NJEL0009S01
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL835B
EL-59
COMBINATION SWITCH
Check/Sedan (Cont’d)
RHD MODELS EXCEPT FOR EUROPE NJEL0009S03
HEL852A
EL-60
COMBINATION SWITCH
Check/Hatchback
Check/Hatchback NJEL0423
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL933L
EL-61
COMBINATION SWITCH
Replacement
Replacement NJEL0010
For removal and installation of spiral cable, refer to RS-29
“Installation — Air Bag Module and Spiral Cable”.
I Each switch can be replaced without removing combination
switch base.
CEL501
I To remove combination switch base, remove base attaching

screw.
CEL406
I Before installing the steering wheel, align the steering wheel

guide pins with the screws which secure the combination
switch as shown in the left figure.
SEL151V
EL-62
STEERING SWITCH
Check
Check NJEL0350
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL453B
EL-63
HEADLAMP
Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —/Sedan Except for Europe
Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —/Sedan Except for

Europe NJEL0013
TWO-BULB TYPE NJEL0013S03
HEL853A
EL-64
HEADLAMP
Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —/Sedan Except for Europe (Cont’d)
FOUR-BULB TYPE NJEL0013S04
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL855A
EL-65
HEADLAMP
Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —/Sedan Except for Europe (Cont’d)
HEL856A
EL-66
HEADLAMP
Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —/Hatchback NJEL0420
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL728L
EL-67
HEADLAMP
Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —/Sedan for Europe
Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —/Sedan for

Europe NJEL0508
HEL519B
EL-68
HEADLAMP
Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —/Sedan for Europe (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL520B
EL-69
HEADLAMP
Trouble Diagnoses
Trouble Diagnoses NJEL0202
Symptom Possible cause Repair order
Neither headlamp operates. 1. Lighting switch 1. Check Lighting switch.
LH headlamp (low and high beam) 1. 15A fuse 1. Check 15A fuse (No. 40, located in fusible link and
does not operate, but RH head- 2. Headlamp LH ground circuit fuse box). Verify battery positive voltage is present
lamp (low and high beam) does 3. Lighting switch at lighting switch terminal 8 (Sedan except for
operate. Europe with two bulbs and Hatchback), headlamp
relay LH terminal 5 (Sedan except for Europe with
four bulbs) or headlamp relay terminal 5 (Sedan for
Europe).
2. Check headlamp LH ground circuit.
3. Check lighting switch.
RH headlamp (low and high beam) 1. 15A fuse 1. Check 15A fuse (No. 39, located in fusible link and
does not operate, but LH headlamp 2. Headlamp RH ground circuit fuse box). Verify battery positive voltage is present
(low and high beam) does operate. 3. Lighting switch at lighting switch terminal 5 (Sedan with two bulbs
and Hatchback), headlamp relay RH terminal 5
(Sedan with four bulbs) or headlamp relay terminal 7
(Sedan for Europe).
2. Check headlamp RH ground circuit.
LH high beam does not operate, 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

but LH low beam does operate. 2. Open in LH high beam circuit 2. Check the harness between lighting switch and LH
3. Lighting switch high beam for an open circuit.
LH low beam does not operate, but 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

LH high beam does operate. 2. Open in LH low beam circuit 2. Check the harness between lighting switch and LH
3. Lighting switch low beam for an open circuit.
RH high beam does not operate, 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

but RH low beam does operate. 2. Open in RH high beam circuit 2. Check the harness between lighting switch and RH
3. Lighting switch high beam for an open circuit.
RH low beam does not operate, 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

but RH high beam does operate. 2. Open in RH low beam circuit 2. Check the harness between lighting switch and RH
3. Lighting switch low beam for an open circuit.
High beam indicator does not work. 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb in combination meter.
2. Ground circuit 2. Check harness between high beam indicator and
3. Open in high beam circuit ground.
3. Check the harness between lighting switch and
combination meter for an open circuit.
EL-70
HEADLAMP
Bulb Replacement
Bulb Replacement NJEL0015

The headlamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replace-
able halogen bulb. The bulb can be replaced from the engine com- GI
partment side without removing the headlamp body.
I Grasp only the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never
touch the glass envelope.
MA
1. Disconnect the battery cable.
2. Disconnect the harness connector from the back side of the EM
bulb (two-bulb type).
Pull off the rubber cap (four-bulb type).
3. Pull off the rubber cap (two-bulb type). LC
Disconnect the harness connector from the back side of the
bulb (four-bulb type).
4. Remove the bulb retaining ring. EC
5. Remove the headlamp bulb carefully. Do not shake or rotate
the bulb when removing it. FE
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Do not leave headlamp reflector without bulb for a long period CL
of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering headlamp body
may affect the performance of the headlamp. Remove head-
SEL918W lamp bulb from the headlamp reflector just before a replace- MT
ment bulb is installed.
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL921W
SC
IDX
EL-71
HEADLAMP
Aiming Adjustment
Aiming Adjustment NJEL0016

For details, refer to the regulations in your own country.
Before performing aiming adjustment, check the following.
1) Keep all tires inflated to correct pressures.
2) Place vehicle on flat surface.
3) See that there is no-load in vehicle (coolant, engine oil filled up
to correct level and full fuel tank) other than the driver (or
equivalent weight placed in driver’s position).
CAUTION:
Be sure aiming switch is set to “0” when performing aiming
adjustment on vehicles equipped with headlamp aiming con-
trol.
SEL984W
LOW BEAM NJEL0016S02

1. Turn headlamp low beam on.
2. Use adjusting screws to perform aiming adjustment.
I First tighten the adjusting screw all the way and then
make adjustment by loosening the screw.
SEL920W
SEL978W
EL-72
HEADLAMP
Aiming Adjustment (Cont’d)
I Adjust headlamps so that main axis of light is parallel to
center line of body and is aligned with point P shown in
illustration. GI
I Figure to the left shows headlamp aiming pattern for driv-
ing on right side of road; for driving on left side of road,
aiming pattern is reversed. MA
I Dotted lines to point P in illustration show center of head-
lamp.
“H”: Horizontal center line of headlamps
EM
“WL”: Distance between each headlamp center
“L”: 5,000 mm (196.85 in) LC
“C”: 65 mm (2.56 in) (Except for China)
Less than 0.1125H (For China)
EC
FE
CL
SEL254I
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-73
HEADLAMP — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
System Description
System Description NJEL0351

The headlamp system on vehicles for North Europe contains a daytime light unit. The unit activates the fol-
lowing whenever the engine is running with the lighting switch in the OFF position:
I Low beam headlamps
I Parking, license, tail and illumination lamps
Power is supplied at all times
I through 10A fuse (No. 38, located in the fusible link and fuse box)
I to daytime light unit terminal 1 and
I to lighting switch terminal 11.
Power is also supplied at all times
Power is also supplied at all times
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
I through 10A fuse [No. 20, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to daytime light unit terminal 7.
With the ignition switch in the START position, power is supplied
Ground is supplied to daytime light unit terminal 9 through body grounds E30 and E73.
HEADLAMP OPERATION (DAYTIME LIGHT CANCEL OPERATION) NJEL0351S01
When the lighting switch is turned to the 1st or 2nd position, power is supplied
I through lighting switch terminal 12,
Then daytime light will be canceled. And the lighting system operation will be the same as no daytime light
system.
DAYTIME LIGHT OPERATION NJEL0351S02
With the engine running and the lighting switch in the OFF position, power is supplied
I from alternator terminal 3
I to daytime light unit terminal 8,
I through daytime light unit terminal 5
I to terminal 3 of headlamp LH,
I to terminal 3 of headlamp RH and
I to tail lamp and illumination.
Ground is supplied to terminal 2 of each headlamp through body grounds E30 and E73.
EL-74
Schematic/Sedan
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL365B
EL-75
Wiring Diagram — DTRL —/Sedan
Wiring Diagram — DTRL —/Sedan NJEL0353
HEL366B
EL-76
Wiring Diagram — DTRL —/Sedan (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL367B
EL-77
Wiring Diagram — DTRL —/Sedan (Cont’d)
HEL368B
EL-78
Schematic/Hatchback
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL729L
EL-79
Wiring Diagram — DTRL —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — DTRL —/Hatchback NJEL0422
MEL730L
EL-80
Wiring Diagram — DTRL —/Hatchback (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL731L
EL-81
Wiring Diagram — DTRL —/Hatchback (Cont’d)
MEL732L
EL-82
Trouble Diagnoses

DAYTIME LIGHT UNIT INSPECTION TABLE NJEL0354S01
GI
Voltage (V)
Terminal No. INPUT (I)/ OUT-
Connections Operated condition (Approximate val-
(Wire color) PUT (O)
ues) MA
Power source for illumina-
1 (B/R) — — 12
tion & tail lamp
EM
Power source for headlamp
2 (R/W) — — 12
LH
LC
Power source for headlamp
3 (R) — — 12
RH
ON (daytime light operating*) 12 EC

4 (PU) Headlamp RH O
OFF 0
ON (daytime light operating*) 12 FE

5 (R/Y) Headlamp LH O
OFF 0
START 12
CL
6 (B/Y) Start signal I Ignition switch
ON, ACC or OFF 0
MT
ON or START 12
7 (BR) Power source — Ignition switch
ACC or OFF 0
AT
Running 12
8 (Y/R) Alternator “L” terminal I Engine
Stopped 0
AX
9 (B/Y) Ground — — —
ON (daytime light operating*) 12

10 (R/L) Illumination & tail lamp O SU
OFF 0
1ST·2ND position 12
11 (W/R) Lighting switch I
BR
OFF 0
*: Daytime light operating: Lighting switch in “OFF” position with engine running. ST
RS
BT
HA

SC
Refer to “HEADLAMP” (EL-71).
IDX
EL-83
Aiming Adjustment
Aiming Adjustment NJEL0356

Refer to “HEADLAMP” (EL-72).
EL-84
HEADLAMP — HEADLAMP AIMING CONTROL —
Wiring Diagram — H/AIM —/Sedan for Europe
Wiring Diagram — H/AIM —/Sedan for Europe NJEL0357
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL665B
EL-85
Wiring Diagram — H/AIM —/For China and Israel
Wiring Diagram — H/AIM —/For China and

Israel NJEL0358
GEL325A
EL-86
Wiring Diagram — H/AIM —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — H/AIM —/Hatchback NJEL0424
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL733L
EL-87
Wiring Diagram — H/AIM —/Hatchback (Cont’d)
MEL734L
EL-88
PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L —/Except for Europe
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L —/Except for Europe NJEL0024
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL857A
EL-89
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L —/Except for Europe (Cont’d)
HEL858A
EL-90
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L —/Sedan for Europe
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L —/Sedan for Europe NJEL0359
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL370B
EL-91
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L —/Sedan for Europe (Cont’d)
HEL027B
EL-92
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L —/Hatchback NJEL0425
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL735L
EL-93
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L —/Hatchback (Cont’d)
MEL736L
EL-94
STOP LAMP
Wiring Diagram — STOP/L —/Sedan
Wiring Diagram — STOP/L —/Sedan NJEL0025
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL028B
EL-95
STOP LAMP
Wiring Diagram — STOP/L —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — STOP/L —/Hatchback NJEL0426
MEL737L
EL-96
BACK-UP LAMP
Wiring Diagram — BACK/L —/Except for Europe
Wiring Diagram — BACK/L —/Except for

Europe NJEL0026
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL860A
EL-97
BACK-UP LAMP
Wiring Diagram — BACK/L —/Sedan for Europe
Wiring Diagram — BACK/L —/Sedan for

Europe NJEL0360
HEL371B
EL-98
BACK-UP LAMP
Wiring Diagram — BACK/L —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — BACK/L —/Hatchback NJEL0427
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL738L
EL-99
FRONT FOG LAMP
Wiring Diagram — F/FOG —/Except for Europe, China and Israel
Wiring Diagram — F/FOG —/Except for Europe,

China and Israel NJEL0028
HEL861A
EL-100
FRONT FOG LAMP
Wiring Diagram — F/FOG —/Sedan for Europe, China and Israel
Wiring Diagram — F/FOG —/Sedan for Europe,

China and Israel NJEL0361
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL030B
EL-101
FRONT FOG LAMP
Wiring Diagram — F/FOG —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — F/FOG —/Hatchback NJEL0428
MEL739L
EL-102
FRONT FOG LAMP
Bulb Replacement

The front fog lamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a
replaceable halogen bulb. GI
I Grasp only the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never
touch the glass envelope.
MA
1. Disconnect the battery cable.
2. Disconnect the harness connector from the back side of the
bulb. EM
3. Pull off the bulb cover.
4. Remove the front fog lamp bulb carefully. Do not shake or
rotate the bulb when removing it. LC
5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: EC
I Do not leave front fog lamp reflector without bulb for a
long period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering
front fog lamp body may affect the performance of the FE
front fog lamp. Remove front fog lamp bulb from the front
fog lamp reflector just before a replacement bulb is
installed. CL
SEL975W
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-103
FRONT FOG LAMP
Aiming Adjustment
Aiming Adjustment =NJEL0029

Before performing aiming adjustment, make sure of the following.
1) Keep all tires inflated to correct pressure.
2) Place vehicle on level ground.
3) See that vehicle is unloaded (except for full levels of coolant,
engine oil and fuel, and spare tire, jack, and tools). Have the
driver or equivalent weight placed in driver’s seat.
Adjust aiming in the vertical direction by turning the adjusting
screw.
SEL976W
SEL480X
1. Set the distance between the screen and the center of the fog
lamp lens as shown at left.
2. Remove front fog lamp rim. For detail, refer to “BODY END” in
BT section.
3. Turn front fog lamps ON.
MEL327G
4. Adjust front fog lamps so that the top edge of the high inten-
sity zone is 152 mm (6.0 in) (Sedan) or 91 to 136 mm (3.58 to
5.35 in) (Hatchback) below the height of the fog lamp centers
as shown at left.
I When performing adjustment, if necessary, cover the head-
lamps and opposite fog lamp.
SEL495X
EL-104
REAR FOG LAMP
Wiring Diagram — R/FOG —/Sedan
Wiring Diagram — R/FOG —/Sedan NJEL0362

WITHOUT FRONT FOG LAMP NJEL0362S01
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
GEL326A
EL-105
REAR FOG LAMP
Wiring Diagram — R/FOG —/Sedan (Cont’d)
WITH FRONT FOG LAMP FOR EUROPE NJEL0362S02
GEL346A
EL-106
REAR FOG LAMP
Wiring Diagram — R/FOG —/Sedan (Cont’d)
WITH FRONT FOG LAMP EXCEPT FOR EUROPE NJEL0362S03
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
GEL327A
EL-107
REAR FOG LAMP
Wiring Diagram — R/FOG —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — R/FOG —/Hatchback NJEL0429
MEL740L
EL-108
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
System Description/Sedan
System Description/Sedan NJEL0030

TURN SIGNAL OPERATION NJEL0030S01
With the hazard switch in the OFF position and the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is sup-
GI
plied
I through 10A fuse [No. 26, located in the fuse block (J/B)] MA
I to hazard switch terminal 2
I through terminal 1 of the hazard switch
I to combination flasher unit terminal 1 EM
I through terminal 3 of the combination flasher unit
I to turn signal lamp switch terminal 1. LC
Ground is supplied to combination flasher unit terminal 2 through body grounds M28 and M67.
LH Turn NJEL0030S0101 EC
When the turn signal lamp switch is moved to the L position, power is supplied from turn signal lamp switch
terminal 3 to
I front turn signal lamp LH terminal 1 and side turn signal lamp LH terminal 1 FE
I combination meter terminal 11 (with tachometer) or 6 (without tachometer).
I rear combination lamp LH (turn signal) terminal 2.
CL
Ground is supplied to the front turn signal lamp LH terminal 2 and side turn signal lamp LH terminal 2 through
body grounds E30 and E73.
Ground is supplied to the rear combination lamp LH (turn signal) terminal 1 through body grounds B9, B21 MT
and B308.
Ground is supplied to combination meter terminal 56 (with tachometer) or 60 (without tachometer) through
body grounds M28 and M67. AT
With power and ground supplied, the combination flasher unit controls the flashing of the LH turn signal lamps.
RH Turn NJEL0030S0102 AX
When the turn signal lamp switch is moved to the R position, power is supplied from turn signal lamp switch
terminal 2 to
I front turn signal lamp RH terminal 1 and side turn signal lamp RH terminal 1 SU
I combination meter terminal 48 (with tachometer) or 64 (without tachometer)
I rear combination lamp RH (turn signal) terminal 2.
BR
Ground is supplied to the front turn signal lamp RH terminal 2 and side turn signal lamp RH terminal 2 through
body grounds E30 and E73.
Ground is supplied to the rear combination lamp RH (turn signal) terminal 1 through body grounds B9, B21 ST
and B308.
body grounds M28 and M67. RS
With power and ground supplied, the combination flasher unit controls the flashing of the RH turn signal lamps.
HAZARD LAMP OPERATION NJEL0030S02 BT
Power is supplied at all times to hazard switch terminal 3 through:
I 15A fuse [No. 5, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
With the hazard switch in the ON position, power is supplied HA
I through terminal 1 of the hazard switch
I to combination flasher unit terminal 1
SC
I through terminal 3 of the combination flasher unit
I to hazard switch terminal 4.
Ground is supplied to combination flasher unit terminal 2 through body grounds M28 and M67.
Power is supplied through terminal 5 of the hazard switch to
I front turn signal lamp LH terminal 1 and side turn signal lamp LH terminal 1
IDX
I rear combination lamp LH (turn signal) terminal 2.
Power is supplied through terminal 6 of the hazard switch to
I front turn signal lamp RH terminal 1 and side turn signal lamp RH terminal 1
EL-109
System Description/Sedan (Cont’d)
I rear combination lamp RH (turn signal) terminal 2.
Ground is supplied to terminal 2 of each front turn signal lamp and terminal 2 of each side turn signal lamp
through body grounds E30 and E73.
Ground is supplied to terminal 1 of each rear combination lamp (turn signal) through body grounds B9, B21
and B308.
body grounds M28 and M67.
With power and ground supplied, the combination flasher unit controls the flashing of the hazard warning
lamps.
MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION NJEL0030S03
Except for Europe NJEL0030S0301
I to multi-remote control relay terminals 1, 6 and 3.
Ground is supplied to multi-remote control relay terminal 2, when the multi-remote control system is triggered
through the smart entrance control unit.
Refer to “MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM”, EL-528.
The multi-remote control relay is energized.
Power is supplied through terminal 5 of the multi-remote control relay
I to front turn signal lamp LH terminal 1 and side turn signal lamp LH terminal 1
I to combination meter terminal 11 (with tachometer) or 6 (without tachometer)
I to rear combination lamp LH (turn signal) terminal 2.
Power is supplied through terminal 7 of the multi-remote control relay
I to front turn signal lamp RH terminal 1 and side turn signal lamp RH terminal 1
I to combination meter terminal 11 (with tachometer) or 64 (without tachometer)
I to rear combination lamp RH (turn signal) terminal 2.
Ground is supplied to terminal 1 of each rear combination lamp through body grounds B9, B21 and B308.
body grounds M28 and M67.
With power and ground supplied, the smart entrance control unit controls the flashing of the hazard warning
lamps.
For Europe NJEL0030S0302
When the multi-remote control system is triggered,
power is supplied through terminal 8 of the multi-remote control unit.
I to front turn signal lamp LH terminal 1 and side turn signal lamp LH terminal 1
I to combination meter terminal 11
I to rear combination lamp LH terminal 2, and
power is supplied through terminal 3 of the multi-remote control unit.
I to front turn signal lamp RH terminal 1 and side turn signal lamp RH terminal 1
I to combination meter terminal 48
I to rear combination lamp RH terminal 2.
Ground is supplied to terminal 1 of each rear combination lamp through body grounds B9, B21 and B308.
Ground is supplied to combination meter terminal 56 through body grounds M28 and M67.
With power and ground supplied, the multi-remote control unit controls the flashing of the hazard warning
lamps.
For details, refer to “MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM” in EL-555.
EL-110
Schematic/Sedan
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL034B
EL-111
Wiring Diagram — TURN —/Sedan Except for Europe
Wiring Diagram — TURN —/Sedan Except for

Europe NJEL0032
HEL863A
EL-112
Wiring Diagram — TURN —/Sedan Except for Europe (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL864A
EL-113
Wiring Diagram — TURN —/Sedan Except for Europe (Cont’d)
HEL865A
EL-114
Wiring Diagram — TURN —/Sedan for Europe
Wiring Diagram — TURN —/Sedan for Europe NJEL0364
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL374B
EL-115
Wiring Diagram — TURN —/Sedan for Europe (Cont’d)
HEL375B
EL-116
Trouble Diagnoses/Sedan
Trouble Diagnoses/Sedan NJEL0033
Symptom Possible cause Repair order GI

Turn signal and hazard warning 1. Hazard switch 1. Check hazard switch.
lamps do not operate. 2. Combination flasher unit 2. Refer to combination flasher unit check.
3. Open in combination flasher unit 3. Check wiring to combination flasher unit for open MA
circuit circuit.
4. Combination flasher unit ground 4. Check combination flasher unit ground circuit.
circuit EM
Turn signal lamps do not operate 1. 10A fuse 1. Check 10A fuse [No. 26, located in fuse block (J/B)].
but hazard warning lamps operate. 2. Hazard switch Turn ignition switch ON and verify battery positive LC
3. Turn signal lamp switch voltage is present at terminal 2 of hazard switch.
4. Open in turn signal lamp switch 2. Check hazard switch.
circuit 3. Check turn signal lamp switch.
4. Check the wire between combination flasher unit EC
terminal 3 and turn signal lamp switch terminal 1 for
open circuit.
FE
Hazard warning lamps do not oper- 1. 15A fuse 1. Check 15A fuse [No. 5, located in fuse block (J/B)].
ate but turn signal lamps operate. 2. Hazard switch Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal
3. Open in hazard switch circuit 3 of hazard switch. CL
2. Check hazard switch.
3. Check the wire between combination flasher unit
terminal 3 and hazard switch terminal 4 for open
circuit.
MT
Front turn signal lamp LH or RH 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.
does not operate. 2. Grounds E30 and E73 2. Check grounds E30 and E73. AT
3. Open in front turn signal lamp 3. Check the wire between front turn signal lamp and
circuit turn signal lamp switch.
Rear turn signal lamp LH or RH 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb. AX

does not operate. 2. Grounds B9, B21 and B308 2. Check grounds B9, B21 and B308.
3. Open in rear turn signal lamp 3. Check the wire between rear turn signal lamp and
circuit turn signal lamp switch. SU
LH and RH turn indicators do not 1. Ground 1. Check grounds M28 and M67.
operate. BR
LH or RH turn indicator does not 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb in combination meter.
operate. 2. Open combination meter circuit 2. Check the wire between hazard switch and combi-
nation meter. ST
RS
BT
HA
Electrical Components Inspection NJEL0034

SC
COMBINATION FLASHER UNIT CHECK NJEL0034S01
I Before checking, ensure that bulbs meet specifications.
I Connect a battery and test lamp to the combination flasher
unit, as shown. Combination flasher unit is properly function-
ing if it blinks when power is supplied to the circuit. IDX
SEL122E
EL-117
System Description/Hatchback
System Description/Hatchback NJEL0430

TURN SIGNAL OPERATION NJEL0430S01
I through 15A fuse [No. 5, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I to time control unit terminal 9
Ground is supplied to time control unit terminal 16 through body grounds M28 and M67.
LH Turn NJEL0430S0101
When the turn signal switch is moved to the L position, ground is supplied from body grounds E30 and E73
to
I time control unit terminal 2
I through turn signal switch terminal 3
With ground is supplied, time control unit controls the flashing of the LH turn signal lamps.
RH Turn NJEL0430S0102
When the turn signal switch is moved to the R position, ground is supplied from body grounds E30 and E73
to
I through turn signal switch terminal 2
With ground is supplied, time control unit controls the flashing of the RH turn signal lamps.
HAZARD LAMP OPERATION NJEL0430S02
With the hazard switch in the ON position, ground is supplied from body grounds M28 and M67 to
I through hazard switch terminal 3
With ground is supplied, time control unit controls the flashing of the hazard warning lamps.
HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION FOR MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM NJEL0430S04
When the doors are locked or unlocked by multi-remote controller, time control unit controls turn lamps haz-
ard reminder flashes as follows.
I Locked operation: Flash once
I Unlock operation: Flash twice
EL-118
Wiring Diagram — TURN —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — TURN —/Hatchback NJEL0431
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL741L
EL-119
Wiring Diagram — TURN —/Hatchback (Cont’d)
MEL742L
EL-120
Trouble Diagnoses/Hatchback
Trouble Diagnoses/Hatchback NJEL0432
Symptom Possible cause Repair order GI

Turn signal and hazard warning 1. Time control unit 1. Check power door lock operation.
lamps do not operate. 2. Time control unit circuit 2. Check power supply and ground circuit for time con-
trol unit. MA
Turn signal lamps do not operate 1. Turn signal switch 1. Check turn signal switch.
but hazard warning lamps operate. 2. Open in turn signal switch cir- 2. Check turn signal switch ground for open circuit. EM
cuit
Hazard warning lamps do not 1. Hazard switch 1. Check hazard switch.

operate but turn signal lamps 2. Open in hazard switch circuit 2. Check hazard switch ground for open circuit. LC
operate.
Front turn signal lamp LH or RH 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb. EC

does not operate. 2. Open in front turn signal lamp 2. Check power supply and ground circuit for front turn
circuit signal lamp.
Side turn signal lamp LH or RH 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb. FE

does not operate. 2. Open in rear combination lamp 2. Check power supply and ground circuit for rear com-
circuit bination lamp.
CL
Rear combination lamp LH or RH 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.
does not operate. 2. Open in side turn signal lamp 2. Check grounds check power supply and ground circuit
circuit for rear combination lamp.
MT
LH and RH turn indicators do not 1. Ground 1. Check grounds E30 (RHD models) and E73 (LHD
operate. models)
AT
LH or RH turn indicator does not 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb in combination meter.
operate.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-121
ILLUMINATION
Schematic/Sedan
GEL328A
EL-122
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL —/Sedan Except for Europe
Wiring Diagram — ILL —/Sedan Except for

Europe NJEL0037
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL867A
EL-123
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL —/Sedan Except for Europe (Cont’d)
HEL471B
EL-124
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL —/Sedan Except for Europe (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL472B
EL-125
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL —/Sedan for Europe
Wiring Diagram — ILL —/Sedan for Europe NJEL0365
HEL377B
EL-126
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL —/Sedan for Europe (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL378B
EL-127
ILLUMINATION
Schematic/Hatchback
MEL747L
EL-128
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — ILL —/Hatchback NJEL0434
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL748L
EL-129
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL —/Hatchback (Cont’d)
MEL749L
EL-130
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL —/Hatchback (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL750L
EL-131
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL —/New Sedan Except for Europe
Wiring Diagram — ILL —/New Sedan Except for

Europe NJEL0536
GEL329A
EL-132
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL —/New Sedan Except for Europe (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
GEL330A
EL-133
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL —/New Sedan Except for Europe (Cont’d)
GEL331A
EL-134
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
System Description/With Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe
System Description/With Multi-remote Control

System Except for Europe NJEL0165
GI
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND NJEL0165S01
Power is supplied at all times:
I through 10A fuse (No. 37, located in the fuse and fusible link box) MA
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 10
EM
I to key switch terminal 1
I to interior room lamp terminal 1. LC
When the key is removed from ignition key cylinder, power is interrupted:
I through key switch terminal 2
EC
With the ignition key switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied:
I through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)] FE
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 33.
Ground is supplied: CL
I through body grounds terminals M28 and M67.
When the driver side door is opened, ground is supplied: MT
I through body grounds B9, B21 and B308
I to door switch driver side terminal 3 AT
I from door switch driver side terminal 2
When any door is opened, ground is supplied: AX
I through case ground of each door switch
I to each door switch terminal 1 SU
When the driver side door is unlocked, the smart entrance control unit receive a ground signal:
I through body grounds terminals M28 and M67
BR
I to door lock actuator driver side (unlock sensor) terminal 4
I from door lock actuator driver side (unlock sensor) terminal 2 ST
When a signal, or combination of signals is received by the smart entrance control unit, ground is supplied:
RS
I through smart entrance control unit terminal 8
I to interior lamp terminal 2.
With power and ground supplied, the interior lamp illuminates. BT
SWITCH OPERATION NJEL0165S02
When interior room lamp switch is ON, ground is supplied: HA
I through case grounds of interior room lamp
I to interior room lamp.
SC
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP TIMER OPERATION NJEL0165S03
When interior room lamp switch is in the “DOOR” position, the smart entrance control unit keeps the interior
room lamp illuminated for about 30 seconds when:
I unlock signal is supplied from driver’s door unlock sensor or multi-remote controller while all doors are
closed and key is out of ignition key cylinder
IDX
I key is removed from ignition key cylinder while all doors are closed
I driver’s door is opened and then closed while key is out of the iginition key cylinder. (However, if the driv-
er’s door is closed with the key inserted in the ignition key cylinder after the driver’s door is opened with
the key removed, the timer is operated.)
The timer is canceled when:
EL-135
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
System Description/With Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe (Cont’d)
I driver’s door is locked,
I driver’s door is opened, or
I ignition switch is turned ON.
ON-OFF CONTROL NJEL0165S04
When the driver side door, front passenger door, rear LH or RH door is opened, the interior room lamp turns
on while the interior room lamp switch is in the “DOOR” position.
EL-136
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L —/With Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe
Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L —/With

Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe NJEL0163
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL870A
EL-137
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L —/With Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe (Cont’d)
HEL871A
EL-138
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure/With Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure/With Multi-

remote Control System Except for Europe
“INT LAMP”
=NJEL0213
GI
NJEL0213S01
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Connect CONSULT-II to the data link connector. MA
EM
SEF094YA LC
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Touch “START”.
EC
FE
CL
PBR455D
MT
5. Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL845W
6. Touch “INT LAMP”.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL846W
7. Select diagnosis mode. SC

“DATA MONITOR” is available for “INT LAMP”.
IDX
SEL788W
EL-139
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
CONSULT-II Application Items/With Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe
CONSULT-II Application Items/With

“INT LAMP” NJEL0214S01
Data Monitor NJEL0214S0101
Monitored Item Description
IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.
KEY ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch.
DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch (Driver’s door).
DOOR SW-ALL Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door switch (All).
LOCK SIG DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door unlock sensor (Driver’s door).
EL-140
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/With Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe
Trouble Diagnoses/With Multi-remote Control

System Except for Europe =NJEL0215
GI
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 NJEL0215S01
SYMPTOM: Interior lamp timer does not operate.
1 CHECK IGNITION ON SIGNAL MA
With CONSULT-II
Check ignition switch ON signal (“IGN ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL318W CL
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 33 and ground.
MT
AT
AX
SU
SEL380WA
OK or NG
BR
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Check the following. ST
I 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-141
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/With Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe (Cont’d)
2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
Check driver door switch input signal (“DOOR SW-DR”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL319W
Without CONSULT-II
SEL839W
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.
3 CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR SWITCH

Check continuity between door switch terminals 2 and 3.
SEL325WA
OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Driver side door switch ground circuit and condition
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and driver side door
switch
NG © Replace driver side door switch.
EL-142
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
4 CHECK FRONT DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II GI
Check front door unlock sensor input signal (“LOCK SIG DR”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL344WB
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 36 and ground. FE
CL
MT
AT
SEL847W AX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6. SU
NG © GO TO 5.
BR
5 CHECK FRONT DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR
1. Disconnect front door unlock sensor harness connector.
2. Check continuity between door unlock sensor terminals. ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL848W SC
OK or NG
I Door unlock sensor ground circuit
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door unlock sensor
NG © Replace door unlock sensor.
IDX
EL-143
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

With CONSULT-II
Check door switch input signal (“DOOR SW-ALL”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL323W
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminals 28 and ground.
SEL849W
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.
7 CHECK DOOR SWITCHES

1. Disconnect door switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between door switch terminal 1 and ground.
SEL794WA
OK or NG
I Door switch ground condition
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door switch
NG © Replace door switch.
EL-144
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
8 CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II GI
Check key switch input signal (“KEY ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL315W
Without CONSULT-II
CL
MT
AT
SEL838W AX
OK or NG
OK © Replace smart entrance control unit. SU
NG © GO TO 9.
BR
9 CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT)
Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL906Y
SC
OK or NG
I Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and key switch
IDX
NG © Replace key switch.
EL-145
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
SYMPTOM: Interior lamp timer does not cancel properly.
1 CHECK IGNITION ON SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check ignition switch ON signal (“IGN ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL318W
Without CONSULT-II
SEL380WA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Check the following.
EL-146
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

With CONSULT-II GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL319W
Without CONSULT-II
CL
MT
AT
SEL839W AX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. SU
NG © GO TO 3.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL325WA
SC
OK or NG
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and driver side door
switch
IDX
EL-147
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

With CONSULT-II
Check front door unlock sensor input signal (“LOCK SIG DR”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL344WB
Without CONSULT-II
SEL847W
OK or NG
OK © Replace smart entrance control unit.
NG © GO TO 5.

1. Disconnect front door unlock sensor harness connector.
2. Check continuity between door unlock sensor terminals.
SEL848W
OK or NG
EL-148
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
System Description/With Interior Room Lamp Timer and Without Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe
System Description/With Interior Room Lamp

Timer and Without Multi-remote Control
System Except for Europe GI
=NJEL0315
Power is supplied at all times: MA
I through 30A fusible link (Letter E, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
I to circuit breaker terminal 1
EM
I through circuit breaker terminal 2
I through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)] LC
EC
I to interior room lamp terminal 1.
I through key switch terminal 2 FE
I to time control unit terminal 10.
With the ignition key switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied: CL
Ground is supplied: MT
I through body grounds terminals M28 and M67. AT
When the driver side door is opened, ground is supplied:
I to door switch driver side terminal 3 AX
I to time control unit terminal 20. SU
When any door is opened, ground is supplied:
I to each door switch terminal 1
BR
When the driver side door is unlocked, time control unit receives a ground signal: ST
I to door unlock sensor terminal 1
RS
I from door unlock sensor terminal 2
When a signal, or combination of signals is received by the time control unit, ground is supplied: BT
I through time control unit terminal 5
HA
With power and ground supplied, the interior room lamp illuminates.
SWITCH OPERATION NJEL0315S02 SC
When interior room lamp switch is ON, ground is supplied:
When interior room lamp switch is in the “DOOR” position, the time control unit keeps the interior room lamp IDX
illuminated for about 30 seconds when:
I unlock signal is supplied from driver’s door unlock sensor while all doors are closed and key is out of igni-
tion key cylinder
EL-149
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
System Description/With Interior Room Lamp Timer and Without Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe (Cont’d)
EL-150
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L —/With Interior Lamp Timer and Without Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe
Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L —/With Interior

Lamp Timer and Without Multi-remote Control
NJEL0316
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL473B
EL-151
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L —/With Interior Lamp Timer and Without Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe (Cont’d)
HEL873A
EL-152
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/With Interior Room Lamp Timer and Without Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe
Trouble Diagnoses/With Interior Room Lamp

Timer and Without Multi-remote Control
=NJEL0317
SYMPTOM: Interior lamp timer does not operate. MA
Check voltage between time control unit harness connector terminal 18 and ground. EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL789WA CL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2. MT
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and fuse AT
2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL AX

Check voltage between time control unit harness connector terminal 20 and ground.
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEL844W
OK or NG
BT
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.
HA
SC
IDX
EL-153
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/With Interior Room Lamp Timer and Without Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe (Cont’d)

SEL325WA
OK or NG
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and driver side door switch

SEL850W
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
EL-154
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

1. Disconnect front door unlock sensor harness connector. GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL910W
EC
OK or NG
OK © Check the following. FE
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and door unlock sensor
CL
6 CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL

MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL911W
OK or NG ST
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7. RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-155
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

SEL794WA
OK or NG
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and door switch

Check voltage between time control unit terminal 10 and ground.
SEL843W
OK or NG
OK © Replace time control unit.
NG © GO TO 9.
EL-156
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2. GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL906Y EC
OK or NG
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and key switch
CL

MT
1 CHECK IGNITION ON SIGNAL AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL789WA
OK or NG
RS
OK © GO TO 2.
I 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)] BT
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and fuse
HA
SC
IDX
EL-157
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

SEL844W
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.

SEL325WA
OK or NG

SEL850W
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 5.
EL-158
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

MA
EM
LC
SEL910W
EC
OK or NG
CL
MT
System Description/Sedan With Interior Room
Lamp Timer for Europe AT
NJEL0366
Power is supplied at all times: AX
I to key switch terminal 1 and
I to time control unit terminal 1 SU
I to interior room lamp terminal 1. BR
ST
With the ignition key switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied:
I through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)] RS
Ground is supplied:
BT
When the driver side door is opened, ground is supplied: HA
I to door switch driver side terminal 3
SC
I to each door switch terminal 1 IDX
When the driver side door is unlocked, the time control unit receives a ground signal:
I to door unlock sensor terminal 2 (with super lock system) or 4 (without super lock system)
EL-159
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
System Description/Sedan With Interior Room Lamp Timer for Europe (Cont’d)
I from door unlock sensor terminal 5 (with super lock system) or 2 (without super lock system)
When a signal, or combination of signals is received by the time control unit, ground is supplied:
When interior room lamp switch is ON, ground is supplied:
When interior room lamp switch is in the “DOOR” position, the time control unit keeps the interior room lamp
I unlock signal is supplied from driver’s door unlock sensor or multi-remote controller while all doors are
closed and key is out of ignition key cylinder
EL-160
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L —/Sedan With Interior Room Lamp Timer For Europe
Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L —/Sedan With

Interior Room Lamp Timer For Europe NJEL0367
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL040B
EL-161
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L —/Sedan With Interior Room Lamp Timer For Europe (Cont’d)
HEL454B
EL-162
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/Sedan With Interior Room Lamp Timer for Europe
Trouble Diagnoses/Sedan With Interior Room

Lamp Timer for Europe =NJEL0368
GI
SYMPTOM: Interior room lamp timer does not operate.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL985W
OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Check the following. MT
AT
Check voltage between time control unit harness connector terminal 30 and ground. AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL986W RS
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. BT
NG © GO TO 3.
HA
SC
IDX
EL-163
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/Sedan With Interior Room Lamp Timer for Europe (Cont’d)

SEL325WA
OK or NG

SEL987W
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
EL-164
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

1. Disconnect door unlock sensor harness connector. GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL908XB
EC
OK or NG
CL

MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL989W
OK or NG ST
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7. RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-165
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

SEL794WA
OK or NG

SEL990W
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 9.
EL-166
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

MA
EM
LC
SEL906Y EC
OK or NG
CL

MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL985W
OK or NG
RS
OK © GO TO 2.
HA
SC
IDX
EL-167
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

SEL986W
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.

SEL325WA
OK or NG

SEL987W
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 5.
EL-168
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

MA
EM
LC
SEL908X
EC
OK or NG
CL
MT
System Description/Hatchback With Interior
Room Lamp Timer AT
NJEL0435
Power is supplied at all times: AX
I to time control unit terminal 9,
I through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)] SU
I to key switch terminal 1 and
I through 10A fuse [No. 13, located in the fuse block (J/B)] BR
ST
With the ignition key switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied: RS
BT
Ground is supplied:
I to time control unit terminal 16 HA
When the driver side door is opened, ground is supplied:
I through body grounds B9, B21 and D96
SC
I through case ground of each door switch IDX
I to each door switch terminal 1
When the driver side door is unlocked, the time control unit receives a ground signal:
EL-169
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
System Description/Hatchback With Interior Room Lamp Timer (Cont’d)
I to door unlock sensor terminal 2
I from door unlock sensor terminal 5
When a signal, or combination of signals is received by the time control unit, ground is supplied:
With power and ground supplied, the interior room lamp illuminates when interior room lamp switch is in
“DOOR” position.
When interior room lamp switch is in “ON” position, ground is supplied:
When interior room lamp switch is in the “DOOR” position, the time control unit keeps the interior room lamp
I unlock signal is supplied from driver’s door unlock sensor while all doors are closed
I driver’s door is opened and then closed
BATTERY SAVER NJEL0435S11
The interior room lamp is turned OFF automatically with the lamp switch in the “DOOR” position after about
30 minutes, if the lamp remains lit by the door switch open signal.
EL-170
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L —/Hatchback With Interior Room Lamp Timer
Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L —/Hatchback With

Interior Room Lamp Timer NJEL0436
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL744L
EL-171
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L —/Hatchback With Interior Room Lamp Timer (Cont’d)
MEL745L
EL-172
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/Hatchback With Interior Room Lamp Timer
Trouble Diagnoses/Hatchback With Interior

Room Lamp Timer =NJEL0437
GI
SYMPTOM: Interior room lamp timer does not operate.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL429X
OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Check the following. MT
AT
Check voltage between time control unit harness connector terminal 6 and ground. AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL430X RS
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. BT
NG © GO TO 3.
HA
SC
IDX
EL-173
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/Hatchback With Interior Room Lamp Timer (Cont’d)

SEL325WA
OK or NG

SEL431X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
EL-174
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

MA
EM
LC
SEL988WA
EC
OK or NG
CL

MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL432X
OK or NG ST
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7. RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-175
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

SEL794WA
OK or NG

SEL433X
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 9.
EL-176
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

MA
EM
LC
SEL913Y EC
OK or NG
CL

MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL429X
OK or NG
RS
OK © GO TO 2.
HA
SC
IDX
EL-177
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

SEL430X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.

SEL325WA
OK or NG

SEL431X
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 5.
EL-178
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

MA
EM
LC
SEL988WA
EC
OK or NG
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-179
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L —/Sedan Without Timer
Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L —/Sedan Without

Timer NJEL0318
HEL379B
EL-180
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L —/Hatchback Without Timer
Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L —/Hatchback

Without Timer NJEL0438
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL945L
EL-181
SPOT AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — INT/L —/Sedan Except for Europe
Wiring Diagram — INT/L —/Sedan Except for

Europe NJEL0319
GEL332A
EL-182
Wiring Diagram — INT/L —/Sedan for Europe
Wiring Diagram — INT/L —/Sedan for Europe NJEL0529
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL666B
EL-183
Wiring Diagram — INT/L —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — INT/L —/Hatchback NJEL0439
MEL746L
EL-184
METERS AND GAUGES
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location/Sedan
Component Parts and Harness Connector

Location/Sedan NJEL0041
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SEL919W
MT
UNIFIED CONTROL METER AT
NJEL0042S06
I Speedometer, odo/trip meter, tachometer, fuel gauge and water temperature gauge are controlled totally
by control unit built-in combination meter. AX
I Digital meter is adopted for odo/trip meter.*
*The record of the odo meter is kept even if the battery cable is disconnected. The record of the trip meter
is erased when the battery cable is disconnected. SU
I Odo/trip meter segment can be checked in diagnosis mode.
I Meter/gauge can be checked in diagnosis mode.
BR
HOW TO CHANGE THE DISPLAY FOR ODO/TRIP METER NJEL0042S07
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
SEL253VB
NOTE:
Turn ignition switch to the “ON” position to operate odo/trip meter.
EL-185
METERS AND GAUGES
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT NJEL0042S08
I to combination meter terminal 18 (with tachometer) or 21 (without tachometer).
Ground is supplied
I through body grounds M28 and M67
WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE NJEL0042S01
The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The reading on the gauge is based
on the resistance of the thermal transmitter.
As the temperature of the coolant increases, the resistance of the thermal transmitter decreases. A variable
ground is supplied to terminal 19 (with tachometer) or 34 (without tachometer) of the combination meter for
the water temperature gauge. The needle on the gauge moves from “C” to “H”.
TACHOMETER NJEL0042S02
With Tachometer Except for Europe NJEL0042S0201
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).
The tachometer is regulated by a signal
I from terminal 8 (Gasoline engine models) or 5 (Diesel engine models) of the ECM
I to combination meter terminal 21 for the tachometer.
For Europe NJEL0042S0202
I from terminal 32 (Gasoline engine models) or 439 (Diesel engine models) of the ECM
FUEL GAUGE NJEL0042S03
The fuel gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank.
The fuel gauge is regulated by a variable ground signal supplied
I from body grounds B9, B21 and B308
I through terminal 1 (Gasoline engine models) or 3 (Diesel engine models) of the fuel level sensor unit and
I through terminal 4 (Gasoline engine models) or 1 (Diesel engine models) of the fuel level sensor unit
I to combination meter terminal 20 (with tachometer) or 35 (without tachometer) for the fuel gauge.
SPEEDOMETER NJEL0042S04
The combination meter provides a voltage signal to the vehicle speed sensor for the speedometer.
The voltage is supplied
I from combination meter terminal 23 (with tachometer) or 37 (without tachometer) for the speedometer
I to terminal 1 of the vehicle speed sensor.
The speedometer converts the voltage into the vehicle speed displayed.
EL-186
METERS AND GAUGES
Combination Meter/Sedan With Tachometer for Bulb Type
Combination Meter/Sedan With Tachometer for

Bulb Type NJEL0043
GI
CHECK NJEL0043S01
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL474B
EL-187
METERS AND GAUGES
Schematic/Sedan With Tachometer for Bulb Type
Schematic/Sedan With Tachometer for Bulb

Type NJEL0320
HEL497B
EL-188
METERS AND GAUGES
Combination Meter/Sedan With Tachometer for LED Type
Combination Meter/Sedan With Tachometer for

LED Type NJEL0530
GI
CHECK NJEL0530S01
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL913B
EL-189
METERS AND GAUGES
Schematic/Sedan With Tachometer for LED Type
Schematic/Sedan With Tachometer for LED

Type NJEL0531
GEL508A
EL-190
METERS AND GAUGES
Combination Meter/Without Tachometer
Combination Meter/Without Tachometer NJEL0321

CHECK NJEL0321S01
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL475B
EL-191
METERS AND GAUGES
Schematic/Without Tachometer
Schematic/Without Tachometer NJEL0322
HEL476B
EL-192
METERS AND GAUGES
Construction/Sedan for Bulb Type
Construction/Sedan for Bulb Type NJEL0324
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SEL929WA
MT
Construction/Sedan for LED Type NJEL0532
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL450Y
HA
SC
IDX
EL-193
METERS AND GAUGES
Wiring Diagram — METER —/Sedan With Tachometer Except for Europe
Wiring Diagram — METER —/Sedan With

Tachometer Except for Europe NJEL0045
GEL334A
EL-194
METERS AND GAUGES
Wiring Diagram — METER —/Without Tachometer
Wiring Diagram — METER —/Without

Tachometer NJEL0323
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL881A
EL-195
METERS AND GAUGES
Wiring Diagram — METER —/Sedan for Europe
Wiring Diagram — METER —/Sedan for Europe

NJEL0369
HEL383B
EL-196
METERS AND GAUGES
Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/Trip Meter Segment Check in Diagnosis Mode/Sedan
Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/Trip Meter

Segment Check in Diagnosis Mode/Sedan NJEL0151
GI
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION NJEL0151S01
I Meters/gauges can be checked in diagnosis mode. MA
HOW TO ALTERNATE DIAGNOSIS MODE NJEL0151S02
1. Turn ignition switch to ON and change odo/trip meter to “TRIP EM
A” or “TRIP B”.
2. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
3. Turn ignition switch to ON when pushing odo/trip meter switch. LC
4. Confirm that trip meter indicates “000.0”.
5. Push odo/trip meter switch more than three times within 5 EC
seconds.
FE
CL
MT
6. All odo/trip meter segments should be turned on.
NOTE: AT
If some segments are not turned on, unified meter control unit with
odo/trip meter should be replaced.
At this point, the unified control meter is turned to diagnosis AX
mode.
SU
BR
SEL110VB
7. Push odo/trip meter switch. Indication of each meter/gauge

should be as shown left during pushing odo/trip meter switch ST
if it is no malfunctioning.
NOTE: RS
It takes about a few seconds for indication of fuel gauge and water
temperature gauge to become stable.
BT
HA
SEL111V
SC
IDX
EL-197
METERS AND GAUGES

PRELIMINARY CHECK FOR BULB TYPE NJEL0046S04
SEL361W
*1: Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/ *3: POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND *5: Symptom Chart 2 (EL-199)
Trip Meter Segment Check in CIRCUIT CHECK (EL-201)
Diagnosis Mode (EL-197) *4: Symptom Chart 1 (EL-199)
*2: METER/GAUGE RESISTANCE
CHECK (EL-206)
EL-198
METERS AND GAUGES
Trouble Diagnoses/Sedan (Cont’d)
SYMPTOM CHART FOR BULB TYPE NJEL0046S10
Symptom Chart 1 (Malfunction is Indicated in
Diagnosis Mode) GI
NJEL0046S1001
Symptom Possible causes Repair order

MA
Odo/trip meter indicates Unified meter control unit Replace unified meter control unit.
malfunction in Diagnosis
mode.
EM
Multiple meter/gauge indi-
cate malfunction in Diagno-
sis mode. LC
One of speedometer/ 1. Meter/Gauge 1. Check resistance of meter/gauge indicating malfunc-
tachometer/fuel gauge/ 2. Unified meter control unit tion. If the resistance is NG, replace the meter/gauge.
water temp. gauge indi- Refer to “METER/GAUGE RESISTANCE CHECK”,
EC
cates malfunction in Diag- EL-206.
nosis mode. 2. If the resistance of meter/gauge is OK, replace unified
meter control unit. FE
Symptom Chart 2 (No Malfunction is Indicated in
Diagnosis Mode) CL
NJEL0046S1002

MT
One of speedometer/ 1. Sensor signal 1. Check the sensor for malfunctioning meter/gauge.
tachometer/fuel gauge/ - Vehicle speed signal INSPECTION/VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (Refer to
water temp. gauge is mal- - Engine revolution signal EL-202.) AT
functioning. - Fuel gauge INSPECTION/ENGINE REVOLUTION SIGNAL
- Water temp. gauge (Refer to EL-203.)
2. Unified meter control unit INSPECTION/FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT (Refer to
Multiple meter/gauge are EL-204.)
AX
malfunctioning. (except INSPECTION/THERMAL TRANSMITTER (Refer to
odo/trip meter) EL-205.)
2. Replace unified meter control unit. SU
Before starting trouble diagnoses below, perform PRELIMINARY
CHECK FOR BULB TYPE, EL-198. BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-199
METERS AND GAUGES
PRELIMINARY CHECK FOR LED TYPE NJEL0046S11
SEL269Y
*1: Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/ *2: POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND *3: Symptom Chart (EL-200)
Trip Meter Segment Check in CIRCUIT CHECK (EL-201)
Diagnosis Mode (EL-197)
SYMPTOM CHART FOR LED TYPE NJEL0046S12
1. Check the sensor for malfunctioning

One of speedometer/fuel gauge/water meter/gauge. INSPECTION/VEHICLE
temp. gauge is malfunctioning. SPEED SIGNAL (Refer to EL-202.)
1. Sensor signal
INSPECTION/ENGINE REVOLUTION
– Vehicle speed signal
SIGNAL (Refer to EL-203.)
– Fuel gauge
INSPECTION/FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
– Water temp. gauge
UNIT (Refer to EL-204.)
Multiple meter/gauge are malfunctioning. 2. Unified meter control unit
INSPECTION/THERMAL TRANSMIT-
(except odo/trip meter) TER (Refer to EL-205.)
2. Replace unified meter control unit.

CHECK FOR LED TYPE, EL-200.
EL-200
METERS AND GAUGES
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK =NJEL0046S07
Power Supply Circuit Check NJEL0046S0701
GI
Terminals Ignition switch position
(+) (−) OFF ACC ON

MA
18 (with
tachometer) Battery Battery Battery
Ground
or 21 (without voltage voltage voltage EM
tachometer)
17 (with
tachometer) Battery
LC
Ground 0V 0V
or 22 (without voltage
tachometer)
EC
If NG, check the following.
FE
I Harness for open or short between fuse and combination
meter CL
SEL655X
MT
Ground Circuit Check NJEL0046S0702
AT
Terminals Continuity
24 - Ground (with tachometer) or 23 -

Ground (without tachometer)
Yes AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL656X
SC
IDX
EL-201
METERS AND GAUGES
INSPECTION/VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR =NJEL0046S03
1 CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR OUTPUT

1. Remove vehicle speed sensor from transmission.
2. Check voltage between combination meter terminal 23 (with tachometer) or 37 (without tachometer) and ground while
quickly turning speed sensor pinion.
SEL657X
OK or NG
OK © Vehicle speed sensor is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR

Check resistance between vehicle speed sensor terminals 1 and 2.
SEL645WA
OK or NG
I Harness between combination meter and vehicle speed sensor
I Vehicle speed sensor ground circuit
NG © Replace vehicle speed sensor.
EL-202
METERS AND GAUGES
INSPECTION/ENGINE REVOLUTION SIGNAL =NJEL0046S02
1 CHECK ECM OUTPUT GI

1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between combination meter terminals 21 and ground at idle and 2,000 rpm.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL658X
OK or NG FE
OK © Engine revolution signal is OK.
NG © Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-203
METERS AND GAUGES
INSPECTION/FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT =NJEL0046S08
1 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT

Check harness continuity between fuel level sensor unit harness connector terminal 1 (Gasoline engine models) or 3 (Die-
sel engine models) and ground.
SEL963W
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair harness or connector.
2 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT

Refer to “FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK” (EL-206).
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Replace fuel level sensor unit.
3 CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN OR SHORT

1. Disconnect combination meter connector and fuel level sensor unit connector.
2. Check continuity between combination meter terminal 20 (with tachometer) or 35 (without tachometer) or and fuel level
sensor unit connector terminal 4 (Gasoline engine) or 1 (Diesel engine).
Continuity should exist.
3. Check continuity between combination meter terminal 20 (with tachometer) or 35 (without tachometer) or and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
SEL907Y
OK or NG
OK © Fuel level sensor unit is OK.
EL-204
METERS AND GAUGES
INSPECTION/THERMAL TRANSMITTER =NJEL0046S09
1 CHECK THERMAL TRANSMITTER GI

Refer to “THERMAL TRANSMITTER CHECK” (EL-207).
OK or NG
MA
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace.
EM
1. Disconnect combination meter connector and thermal transmitter connector.
LC
2. Check continuity between combination meter terminal 19 (with tachometer) or 34 (without tachometer) and thermal
transmitter terminal 1.
EC
3. Check continuity between combination meter terminal 19 (with tachometer) or 34 (without tachometer) and ground.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEL660XA
AX
OK or NG
OK © Thermal transmitter is OK.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-205
METERS AND GAUGES
Electrical Components Inspection/Sedan
Electrical Components Inspection/Sedan =NJEL0047

METER/GAUGE RESISTANCE CHECK NJEL0047S04
Check resistance between installation screws of meter/gauge after
removing meter/gauge.
Screws Resistance
Tacho/Speedometer Fuel/Temp. gauge Ω
A-C A-C Approx. 190 - Approx. 260
B-D B-C Approx. 230 - Approx. 310
SEL933W
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK NJEL0047S01

I For removal, refer to FE-5, “FUEL SYSTEM”.
Gasoline Engine Models Except for Europe NJEL0047S0101
Check the resistance between terminals 4 and 1.
Ohmmeter Resistance
Float position mm (in)
(+) (−) value Ω
*1 Full 60 (2.36) Approx. 4 - 6
4 1 *2 1/2 99 (3.90) 32 - 33
SEL962W
*3 Empty 161 (6.34) 80 - 83
*1 and *3: When float rod is in contact with stopper.
Gasoline Engine Models For Europe NJEL0047S0103

Ohmmeter Resistance
(+) (−) value Ω
*1 Full 38 (1.50) Approx. 5 - 6
4 1 *2 1/2 89 (3.50) 32 - 33
*3 Empty 162 (6.38) 80 - 83
EL-206
METERS AND GAUGES
Electrical Components Inspection/Sedan (Cont’d)
Diesel Engine Except for Europe NJEL0047S0102
GI
Ohmmeter Resistance
(+) (−) value Ω
MA
*1 Full 58 (2.38) Approx. 4 - 6
1 3 *2 1/2 100 (3.94) 32 - 33

EM
*3 Empty 164 (6.46) 80 - 83

SEL908Y LC
Diesel Engine For Europe NJEL0047S0104
Check the resistance between terminals 1 and 3. EC
Ohmmeter Resistance
value Ω
(+) (−) FE
*1 Full 38 (1.50) Approx. 5 - 6
1 3 *2 1/2 90 (3.50) 32 - 33 CL
*3 Empty 162 (6.38) 80 - 83
*1 and *3: When float rod is in contact with stopper. MT

THERMAL TRANSMITTER CHECK NJEL0047S02
Check the resistance between the terminals of thermal transmitter AT
and body ground.
Water temperature Resistance AX
60°C (140°F) Approx. 170 - 210Ω
100°C (212°F) Approx. 47 - 53Ω SU
BR
MEL424F
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL CHECK

NJEL0047S03 ST
2. Turn vehicle speed sensor pinion quickly and measure voltage
across 1 and 2. RS
BT
HA
CEL219AA
SC
IDX
EL-207
METERS AND GAUGES
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location/Hatchback

Location/Hatchback NJEL0441
SEL392XA

UNIFIED CONTROL METER NJEL0442S01
I Speedometer, odo/trip meter, tachometer, fuel gauge and water temperature gauge are controlled totally
by control unit built-in combination meter.
I Digital meter is adopted for odo/trip meter.*
*The record of the odo meter is kept even if the battery cable is disconnected. The record of the trip meter
is erased when the battery cable is disconnected.
I Meter/gauge can be checked in diagnosis mode.
HOW TO CHANGE THE DISPLAY FOR ODO/TRIP METER NJEL0442S02
SEL394X
NOTE:
Turn ignition switch to the “ON” position to operate odo/trip meter.
EL-208
METERS AND GAUGES
System Description/Hatchback (Cont’d)
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT NJEL0442S03
I through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)] GI
I to combination meter terminal 28.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied MA
I to combination meter terminal 40.
Ground is supplied EM
I to combination meter terminal 27. LC
WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE NJEL0442S04
The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The reading on the gauge is based EC
on the resistance of the thermal transmitter.
As the temperature of the coolant increases, the resistance of the thermal transmitter decreases. A variable
ground is supplied to terminal 32 of the combination meter for the water temperature gauge. The needle on FE
the gauge moves from “C” to “H”.
TACHOMETER NJEL0442S05 CL
I from terminal 32 (Gasoline engine models) or 439 (Diesel engine models) of the ECM MT
FUEL GAUGE NJEL0442S06 AT
The fuel gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank.
The fuel gauge is regulated by a variable ground signal supplied
I from body grounds M28 and M67 AX
I through terminals 26 and 27 of combination meter,
I through terminal 1 of the fuel level sensor unit and
SU
I through terminal 4 of the fuel level sensor unit
I to combination meter terminal 31 for the fuel gauge.
SPEEDOMETER BR
NJEL0442S07
The combination meter provides a voltage signal to the vehicle speed sensor for the speedometer.
The voltage is supplied ST
I from combination meter terminal 29 for the speedometer
I to terminal 1 of the vehicle speed sensor.
Ground is supplied RS
I from body grounds M28 and M67
I through terminals 25 and 27 of combination meter BT
I to teminal 2 of the vehicle speed sensor.
The speedometer converts the voltage into the vehicle speed displayed.
HA
SC
IDX
EL-209
METERS AND GAUGES
Combination Meter/Hatchback
Combination Meter/Hatchback NJEL0443

CHECK NJEL0443S01
MEL934L
EL-210
METERS AND GAUGES
Schematic/Hatchback
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL935L
EL-211
METERS AND GAUGES
Construction/Hatchback
Construction/Hatchback NJEL0445
SEL395XA
EL-212
METERS AND GAUGES
Wiring Diagram — METER —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — METER —/Hatchback NJEL0446
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL875L
EL-213
METERS AND GAUGES
Wiring Diagram — METER —/Hatchback (Cont’d)
MEL876L
EL-214
METERS AND GAUGES
Combination Meter Self-Diagnosis/Hatchback
Combination Meter Self-Diagnosis/Hatchback NJEL0447

PERFORMING SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position.
NJEL0447S01
GI
2. Press both reset buttons on the combination meter and keep
them depressed. MA
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position, while keeping the
reset buttons pressed.
4. Release both reset buttons then self-diagnosis will start. The EM
sequence (A to L) is activated by press the either reset buttons.
NOTE:
If either reset button is not pressed for 20 seconds at each step or
LC
if the ignition switch is turned OFF, the self-diagnosis mode is
exited. EC
Check items Display Remarks
FE
A) Odometer segment test All odo trip meter segments are ON.
CL
SEL434X
MT
This information is not used for service. Please skip this
B) Work instruction code
step. AT
SEL435X
AX
C) Software code
step. SU
SEL436X
BR
D) EEPROM code
step. ST
SEL437X
RS
E) Hardware code
step. BT
SEL438X
HA
F) PCB code SC
step.
SEL439X
Tachometer, speedometer, fuel level gauge and water

temperature gauge have sweeping movement test.
Meter/gauge test (The meter/gauges operate MIN. , MAX., MAX. , MIN.
G)
(Sweeping movement) for 2 times) IDX
The odo trip meter segment flushes during the sweep
SEL440X movement.
EL-215
METERS AND GAUGES
Combination Meter Self-Diagnosis/Hatchback (Cont’d)
Check items Display Remarks
Error 1
H)
(Bit 0 - Bit 3)
The segment of each bit displays “0”, meaning no failure.
SEL441X If the bit(s) displays figures other than “0”, the item of the
bit has failed.
For details, refer to “Failure chart for Error 1 and Error E”
below.
Error E
I)
(Bit 4 - Bit 7)
SEL442X
Fuel warning lamp is on and odo trip meter segment

J) Fuel warning lamp test
“FUEL” flashes.
SEL443X
Fuel gauge calibration This information is not used for service. Please skip this
K)
(CAL) step.
SEL444X
Fuel gauge calibration This information is not used for service. Please skip this
L)
(OLD) step.
SEL445X
Failure Chart for “Error 1” and “Error E” NJEL0447S0101
Displayed figure on the

Bit Detectable items Description of the failure bit
Failure No failure
Speedometer input No input signal

signal When no signal is detected for 30 minutes continuously
with the ignition ON, it should be judged as signal failure. 1
(If input signal is detected later, then the judgement will be
0 canceled immediately.) 0
Abnormal input signal
When any signal of frequency which would not exist in nor-
2
mal conditions is detected, it should be judged as signal
failure.
Tachometer input No input signal

signal When no signal is detected for 30 minutes continuously
with the ignition ON, it should be judged as signal failure. 1
(If input signal is detected later, then the judgement will be
1 canceled immediately.) 0
Abnormal input signal
When any signal of frequency which would not exist in nor-
2
mal conditions is detected, it should be judged as signal
failure.
EL-216
METERS AND GAUGES
Combination Meter Self-Diagnosis/Hatchback (Cont’d)
Displayed figure on the

Bit Detectable items Description of the failure bit
GI
Failure No failure
Fuel level input sig- Short circuit

nal When short circuit of the signal line is detected for 5 sec- 1 MA
onds or more, it should be judged as short-circuit failure.
2 0
Open circuit EM
When open circuit of the signal line is detected for 5 sec- 2
onds or more, it should be judged as open-circuit failure.
Water temperature Short circuit LC

input signal When short circuit of the signal line is detected for 5 sec- 1
onds or more, it should be judged as short-circuit failure.
3 0 EC
Open circuit
FE
Outside air tem- Short circuit
perature input sig- When short circuit of the signal line is detected for 5 sec- 1
nal onds or more, it should be judged as short-circuit failure. CL
4 0
Open circuit
MT
Reset buttons Short circuit for reset but- Right side reset button has
1
tons failed. AT
When the short circuit is
continuously detected for 5 Left side reset button has
5 2 0
failed.
minutes or more, it should AX
be judged as short-circuit Both reset buttons have
failure. 3
failed.
6 — — 0 0
SU
CPU EEPROM failure 1
7 0 BR
CPU RAM failure 2
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-217
METERS AND GAUGES

PRELIMINARY CHECK NJEL0448S01
SEL361WA
*1: Combination Meter Self-Diagnosis *3: POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND *4: Symptom Chart 1 (EL-219)
(EL-215) CIRCUIT CHECK (EL-220) *5: Symptom Chart 2 (EL-219)
EL-218
METERS AND GAUGES
Trouble Diagnoses/Hatchback (Cont’d)
SYMPTOM CHART NJEL0448S02
Symptom Chart 1 (Malfunction is Indicated in
Diagnosis Mode) GI
NJEL0448S0201

MA
Odo/trip meter indicates Unified meter control unit Replace unified meter control unit.
malfunction in Diagnosis
mode.
EM
Multiple meter/gauge indi-
cate malfunction in Diagno-
sis mode. LC
One of speedometer/ 1. Meter/Gauge 1. Check resistance of meter/gauge indicating malfunc-
tachometer/fuel gauge/ 2. Unified meter control unit tion. If the resistance is NG, replace the meter/
water temp. gauge indi- gauge.
EC
cates malfunction in Diag- 2. If the resistance of meter/gauge is OK, replace uni-
nosis mode. fied meter control unit.
FE
Symptom Chart 2 (No Malfunction is Indicated in
Diagnosis Mode) NJEL0448S0202 CL
One of speedometer/ 1. Sensor signal 1. Check the sensor for malfunctioning meter/gauge. MT
tachometer/fuel gauge/ - Vehicle speed signal INSPECTION/VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (Refer to
water temp. gauge is mal- - Engine revolution signal EL-221.)
functioning. - Fuel gauge INSPECTION/ENGINE REVOLUTION SIGNAL AT
- Water temp. gauge (Refer to EL-222.)
2. Unified meter control unit INSPECTION/FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT (Refer to
Multiple meter/gauge are EL-223.)
malfunctioning. (except INSPECTION/THERMAL TRANSMITTER (Refer to
AX
odo/trip meter) EL-224.)
2. Replace unified meter control unit.
SU
CHECK, EL-218.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-219
METERS AND GAUGES
Terminals Ignition switch position
Battery Battery Battery

28 Ground
voltage voltage voltage
Battery
40 Ground 0V 0V
voltage
SEL909Y
If NG, check the following.
I Harness for open or short between fuse and combination
meter
27 - Ground Yes
SEL910Y
EL-220
METERS AND GAUGES
INSPECTION/VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR =NJEL0448S04
1 CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR OUTPUT GI

2. Check voltage between combination meter terminal 29 and ground while quickly turning speed sensor pinion.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL398X
OK or NG FE
OK © Vehicle speed sensor is OK.
NG © GO TO 2. CL
2 CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MT

Check resistance between vehicle speed sensor terminals 1 and 2.
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL645WA
OK or NG
ST
I Harness between combination meter and vehicle speed sensor
I Vehicle speed sensor ground circuit RS
NG © Replace vehicle speed sensor.
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-221
METERS AND GAUGES
INSPECTION/ENGINE REVOLUTION SIGNAL =NJEL0448S05
1 CHECK ECM OUTPUT

1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between combination meter terminals 30 and ground at idle and 2,000 rpm.
SEL399X
OK or NG
OK © Engine revolution signal is OK.
NG © Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter
EL-222
METERS AND GAUGES
INSPECTION/FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT =NJEL0448S06
1 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT GI

Check harness continuity between fuel level sensor unit harness connector terminal 1 and ground.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL400X
OK or NG
FE
OK © GO TO 2.
CL
2 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT
Refer to “FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK” (EL-225). MT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3. AT
NG © Replace fuel level sensor unit.
AX
1. Disconnect combination meter connector and fuel level sensor unit connector. SU
2. Check continuity between combination meter terminal 31 and fuel level sensor unit harness connector terminal 4.
3. Check continuity between combination meter terminal 31 and ground. BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL401X
HA
OK or NG
OK © Fuel level sensor unit is OK. SC
IDX
EL-223
METERS AND GAUGES
INSPECTION/THERMAL TRANSMITTER =NJEL0448S07
1 CHECK THERMAL TRANSMITTER

Refer to “THERMAL TRANSMITTER CHECK” (EL-225).
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace.

1. Disconnect combination meter connector and thermal transmitter connector.
2. Check continuity between combination meter terminal 32 and thermal transmitter terminal 1.
3. Check continuity between combination meter terminal 32 and ground.
SEL402X
OK or NG
OK © Thermal transmitter is OK.
EL-224
METERS AND GAUGES
Electrical Components Inspection/Hatchback
Electrical Components Inspection/Hatchback =NJEL0449

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK
I For removal, refer to FE-5, “FUEL SYSTEM”.
NJEL0449S02
GI
Ohmmeter
MA
Resistance
(+) (−) value Ω
EM
*1 Full 142.5 (5.61) Approx. 4 - 6
4 1 *2 1/2 88.7 (3.492) 32 - 33

SEL498X LC
*3 Empty 11.1 (0.437) 80 - 83

EC
FE
CL
MT
THERMAL TRANSMITTER CHECK NJEL0449S03
Check the resistance between the terminals of thermal transmitter AT
and body ground.
Water temperature Resistance AX
65°C (149°F) Approx. 1,179 - 1,417Ω
91°C (196°F) Approx. 474 - 568Ω SU
BR
MEL424F
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL CHECK

NJEL0449S04 ST
2. Turn vehicle speed sensor pinion quickly and measure voltage
across 1 and 2. RS
BT
HA
CEL219AA
SC
IDX
EL-225
WARNING LAMPS
Schematic/Bulb Type for Sedan
Schematic/Bulb Type for Sedan NJEL0049
HEL678B
EL-226
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN —/Bulb Type for Sedan With Tachometer Except for Europe
Wiring Diagram — WARN —/Bulb Type for

Sedan With Tachometer Except for Europe NJEL0050
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL883A
EL-227
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN —/Bulb Type for Sedan With Tachometer Except for Europe (Cont’d)
HEL478B
EL-228
WARNING LAMPS
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL885A
EL-229
WARNING LAMPS
HEL886A
EL-230
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN —/Bulb Type for Sedan Without Tachometer Except for Europe
Wiring Diagram — WARN —/Bulb Type for

Sedan Without Tachometer Except for Europe NJEL0325
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL887A
EL-231
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN —/Bulb Type for Sedan Without Tachometer Except for Europe (Cont’d)
HEL479B
EL-232
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN —/Bulb Type for Sedan Without Tachometer Except for Europe (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL889A
EL-233
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN —/Sedan for Europe
Wiring Diagram — WARN —/Sedan for Europe

NJEL0370
HEL385B
EL-234
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN —/Sedan for Europe (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL386B
EL-235
WARNING LAMPS
HEL667B
EL-236
WARNING LAMPS
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL388B
EL-237
WARNING LAMPS
Schematic/Hatchback
MEL877L
EL-238
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — WARN —/Hatchback NJEL0451
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL878L
EL-239
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN —/Hatchback (Cont’d)
MEL879L
EL-240
WARNING LAMPS
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL880L
EL-241
WARNING LAMPS
MEL881L
EL-242
WARNING LAMPS
Schematic/LED Type for Sedan Except for Europe
Schematic/LED Type for Sedan Except for

Europe NJEL0533
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
GEL509A
EL-243
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN —/LED Type for Sedan Except for Europe
Wiring Diagram — WARN —/LED Type for

Sedan Except for Europe NJEL0534
GEL336A
EL-244
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN —/LED Type for Sedan Except for Europe (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
GEL510A
EL-245
WARNING LAMPS
GEL338A
EL-246
WARNING LAMPS
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
GEL511A
EL-247
WARNING LAMPS
Electrical Components Inspection

FUEL WARNING LAMP OPERATION CHECK NJEL0051S01
2. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit harness connector B29
(Sedan with Gasoline engine or Hatchback) or B30 (Sedan
with Diesel engine).
3. Connect a resistor (80Ω) between fuel level sensor unit har-
ness connector terminals 4 and 1 (Sedan with Gasoline engine
or Hatchback) or 1 and 3 (Sedan with Diesel engine).
SEL977W
The fuel warning lamp should come on.
NOTE:
For QG Engine Only
ECM might store the DTC P0180 during this inspection. If the DTC
is stored in ECM memory, erase the DTC after reconnecting the
fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector. Refer to
EC-46, “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC
INFORMATION”, “Emission-related Diagnostic Information”, “ON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”.
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CHECK NJEL0051S02
Oil pressure
Continuity
kPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi)
More than 10 - 20
Engine running (0.10 - 0.20, 0.1 - 0.2, No
1 - 3)
Less than 10 - 20
Engine not running (0.10 - 0.20, 0.1 - 0.2, Yes
1 - 3)
MEL425F
Check the continuity between the terminals of oil pressure switch
and body ground.
DIODE CHECK NJEL0051S03

I Check continuity using an ohmmeter.
I Diode is functioning properly if test results are as shown in the
figure at left.
I Check diodes at the combination meter harness connector
instead of on the combination meter assembly. Refer to
EL-227, “WARNING LAMP” wiring diagrams.
NOTE:
Specification may vary depending on the type of tester. Before
performing this inspection, be sure to refer to the instruction
SEL901F manual for the tester to be used.
EL-248
A/T INDICATOR
Wiring Diagram — AT/IND —/With Tachometer
Wiring Diagram — AT/IND —/With Tachometer NJEL0159
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL890A
EL-249
A/T INDICATOR
Wiring Diagram — AT/IND —/Without Tachometer
Wiring Diagram — AT/IND —/Without

Tachometer NJEL0326
HEL891A
EL-250
WARNING CHIME
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location/Except for Europe

Location/Except for Europe NJEL0052
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SEL834W
SU
BR
System Description/With Multi-remote Control ST

The warning chime is controlled by the smart entrance control unit.
The warning chime is located in the smart entrance control unit. RS
I to key switch terminal 1,
BT
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 10 HA
I to lighting switch terminal 11
SC
Ground is supplied to smart entrance control unit terminal 16 through body grounds M28 and M67.
When a signal, or combination of signals, is received by the smart entrance control unit, the warning chime
will sound. IDX
IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME NJEL0053S01
With the key in the ignition switch in the OFF position, and the driver’s door open, the warning chime will sound.
Power is supplied
I from key switch terminal 2
EL-251
WARNING CHIME
Ground is supplied
Door switch driver side terminal 3 is grounded through body grounds B9, B21 and B308.
LIGHT WARNING CHIME NJEL0053S02
With ignition switch OFF, driver’s door open, and lighting switch in 1ST or 2ND position, warning chime will
sound. Power is supplied.
I from lighting switch terminal 12 to smart entrance control unit terminal 34
Ground is supplied
EL-252
WARNING CHIME
Wiring Diagram — CHIME —/With Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe
Wiring Diagram — CHIME —/With Multi-remote

Control System Except for Europe NJEL0054
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL892A
EL-253
WARNING CHIME
Wiring Diagram — CHIME —/With Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe (Cont’d)
HEL893A
EL-254
WARNING CHIME

“KEY WARN ALM”/“LIGHT WARN ALM”
=NJEL0216
GI
NJEL0216S01
EM
SEF094YA LC
EC
FE
CL
PBR455D
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL845W
6. Touch “KEY WARN ALM”, “LIGHT WARN ALM” or “SEAT BELT

ALM”. ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL846W
I “DATA MONITOR” and “ACTIVE TEST” are available for the SC

warning chime.
IDX
SEL322W
EL-255
WARNING CHIME

“KEY WARNING ALARM” NJEL0217S01
DOOR SW DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.
Active Test NJEL0217S0102
Test Item Description
This test is able to check key warning chime operation. Key warning chime sounds for 2
CHIME
seconds after touching “ON” on CONSULT-II screen.
“LIGHT WARN ALM” NJEL0217S02

HD/LMP 1ST SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lighting switch.
DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.
This test is able to check light warning chime operation. Light warning chime sounds for 2
CHIME
seconds after touching “ON” on CONSULT-II screen.

REFERENCE PAGE (EL- ) 257 258 259 260

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1
(LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT
GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
(KEY SWITCH INSERT

POWER SUPPLY AND
SIGNAL CHECK)
SIGNAL CHECK)
SYMPTOM
Light warning chime does not activate. X X X
Ignition key warning chime does not acti-

X X X
vate.
All warning chimes do not activate. X X
EL-256
WARNING CHIME
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK NJEL0055S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL835W
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEL836W
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-257
WARNING CHIME
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 (LIGHTING SWITCH
INPUT SIGNAL CHECK) =NJEL0055S03
1 CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
Check lighting switch input signal (“HD/LMP 1ST SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL316W
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit terminal 34 and ground.
SEL837W
OK or NG
OK © Lighting switch is OK.
I 10A fuse (No. 38, located in the fusible link and fuse box)
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and lighting switch
I Harness for open or short between lighting switch and fuse
I Lighting switch
EL-258
WARNING CHIME
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 (KEY SWITCH INSERT
SIGNAL CHECK) =NJEL0055S04
GI
With CONSULT-II
Check key switch input signal (“KEY ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL315W FE
Without CONSULT-II
CL
MT
AT
AX
SEL838W
SU
OK or NG
OK © Key switch is OK.
BR
NG © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT) ST

RS
BT
HA
SC
SEL906Y
OK or NG
I 10A fuse [No. 12, located in fuse block (J/B)] IDX
EL-259
WARNING CHIME

With CONSULT-II
Check ignition switch ON signal (“IGN ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL318W
Without CONSULT-II
SEL380WA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
EL-260
WARNING CHIME

With CONSULT-II GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL319W
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit terminal 29 and ground. FE
CL
MT
AT
SEL839W AX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. SU
NG © GO TO 3.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL325WA
SC
OK or NG
I Door switch driver side ground circuit and condition
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door switch driver
side
NG © Replace door switch driver side.
IDX
EL-261
WARNING CHIME
4 CHECK WARNING CHIME

With CONSULT-II
Perform “CHIME” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL320W
OK or NG
OK © System is OK.
NG © Replace smart entrance control unit.
System Description/Without Multi-remote

The warning chime is controlled by the time control unit.
The warning chime is located in the time control unit.
I to lighting switch terminal 11
I through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)] (without power door lock) or through 30A fus-
ible link [letter E, located in the fusible link and fuse box) (with power door lock)
When a signal, or combination of signals, is received by the time control unit, the warning chime will sound.
With the key in the ignition switch in the OFF position, and the driver’s door open, the warning chime will sound.
Power is supplied
Ground is supplied
sound. Power is supplied.
I from lighting switch terminal 12 to time control unit terminal 15.
Ground is supplied
EL-262
WARNING CHIME
System Description/Without Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe (Cont’d)
Door switch driver side terminal 3 is grounded through body grounds B9, B21 and B308. GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-263
WARNING CHIME
Wiring Diagram — CHIME —/Without Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe
Wiring Diagram — CHIME —/Without

Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe
NJEL0328
HEL480B
EL-264
WARNING CHIME
Wiring Diagram — CHIME —/Without Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL895A
EL-265
WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses/Without Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe
Trouble Diagnoses/Without Multi-remote

(KEY SWITCH INSERT

POWER SUPPLY AND
SIGNAL CHECK)
SIGNAL CHECK)
SYMPTOM
Light warning chime does not activate. X X X
Ignition key warning chime does not acti-

X X X
vate.

SEL840W
SEL841W
EL-266
WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses/Without Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL842W
OK or NG FE
NG © Check the following. CL
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and lighting switch
I Harness for open or short between lighting switch and fuse MT
I Lighting switch
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 (KEY SWITCH INSERT AT

SIGNAL CHECK) NJEL0329S04
1 CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL AX

SU
BR
ST
RS
SEL843W
OK or NG
BT
NG © GO TO 2.
HA
SC
IDX
EL-267
WARNING CHIME

SEL906Y
OK or NG

SEL789WA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
EL-268
WARNING CHIME

Check voltage between time control unit terminal 20 and ground. GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL844W
EC
OK or NG
OK © System is OK.
FE
NG © GO TO 3.

CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
SEL325WA
OK or NG BR
I Door switch driver side ground circuit and condition ST
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and door switch driver side
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-269
WARNING CHIME
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location/Sedan for Europe

Location/Sedan for Europe NJEL0371
SEL011XB
System Description/Sedan for Europe NJEL0372

The warning chime is located in the time control unit.
I to time control unit terminal 1,
I to lighting switch terminal 11, and
I to daytime light unit terminal 1 (with daytime light system)
With the key in the ignition switch in the OFF position, the driver’s door open and driver’s door locked, the
warning chime will sound.
Power is supplied
EL-270
WARNING CHIME
System Description/Sedan for Europe (Cont’d)
Ground is supplied
I to time control unit terminal 30, and GI
When driver’s door is unlocked, ground is interrupted,
MA
I from door lock actuator assembly driver side terminal 5
Door lock actuator assembly driver side terminal 2 is grounded through body grounds M28 and M67. EM
With ignition switch OFF, driver’s door open, and lighting switch in 1ST or 2ND position, warning chime will LC
sound.
Power is supplied.
I from lighting switch terminal 12 or daytime light control unit terminal 10 (with daytime light system) to time EC
control unit terminal 19
Ground is supplied FE
Door switch driver side terminal 3 is grounded through body grounds B9, B21 and B308. CL
MT
Door lock actuator assembly driver side terminal 2 is grounded through body grounds M28 and M67.
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-271
WARNING CHIME
Wiring Diagram — CHIME —/Sedan for Europe
Wiring Diagram — CHIME —/Sedan for Europe

NJEL0373
GEL512A
EL-272
WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses/Sedan for Europe
Trouble Diagnoses/Sedan for Europe NJEL0374

GI
REFERENCE PAGE (EL- ) 273 274 275 276 277
MA
(DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR CHECK)

EM
(KEY SWITCH INSERT

POWER SUPPLY AND
LC
SIGNAL CHECK)
SIGNAL CHECK)
EC
SYMPTOM FE
Light warning chime does not acti-
X X X
vate.
CL
Ignition key warning chime does not
X X X X
activate.
All warning chimes do not activate. X X MT

AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL911Y
ST
Ground Circuit Check NJEL0374S0202 RS
BT
HA
SC
SEL912Y
IDX
EL-273
WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses/Sedan for Europe (Cont’d)

SEL993WA
OK or NG
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and lighting switch/daytime light
control unit
I Lighting switch
EL-274
WARNING CHIME
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL990W
OK or NG FE
NG © GO TO 2. CL
2 CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT) MT

AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL906Y
OK or NG ST
I Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse RS
NG © Replace key switch. BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-275
WARNING CHIME
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 (DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR
CHECK) NJEL0374S08
1 CHECK DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL

SEL987W
OK or NG
OK © Door lock actuator assembly driver side is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR

1. Disconnect door lock actuator assembly driver side connector.
2. Check continuity between door lock actuator assembly driver side terminals 2 and 5.
SEL988WB
OK or NG
I Door lock actuator assembly driver side ground circuit
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and door lock actuator assembly
driver side
NG © Replace door lock actuator assembly driver side.
EL-276
WARNING CHIME
1 CHECK IGNITION ON SIGNAL GI

MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL985W
OK or NG
FE
OK © GO TO 2.
I 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)] CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL986W
OK or NG
ST
OK © System is OK.
NG © GO TO 3. RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-277
WARNING CHIME

SEL325WA
OK or NG
I Door switch driver side ground circuit and condition

Location/Hatchback NJEL0452
SEL446X
EL-278
WARNING CHIME

The warning chime is located in the time control unit. GI
MA
I to key switch terminal 1. EM
LC
I to time control unit terminal 1. EC
FE
With the key in the ignition switch in the OFF position, the driver’s door open and driver’s door locked, the
warning chime will sound. CL
Power is supplied
I from key switch terminal 2 MT
Ground is supplied
I from door switch driver side terminal 2 AT
Door switch driver side terminal 3 is grounded through body grounds B9 and B21. AX
I to time control unit terminal 35 SU
Door lock actuator assembly driver side terminal 2 is grounded through body grounds M28 and M67.
BR
sound.
Power is supplied. ST
I from lighting switch terminal 12 or daytime light control unit terminal 10 (with daytime light system) to time
control unit terminal 19
RS
Ground is supplied
I to time control unit terminal 30. BT
Door switch driver side terminal 3 is grounded through body grounds B9 and B21.
HA
SC
IDX
EL-279
WARNING CHIME
Wiring Diagram — CHIME —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — CHIME —/Hatchback NJEL0454
MEL882L
EL-280
WARNING CHIME
Wiring Diagram — CHIME —/Hatchback (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL883L
EL-281
WARNING CHIME

(DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR CHECK)

(KEY SWITCH INSERT

POWER SUPPLY AND
SIGNAL CHECK)
SIGNAL CHECK)
SYMPTOM
Light warning chime does not acti-

X X X
vate.
Ignition key warning chime does not

X X X X
activate.

SEL447X
SEL448X
EL-282
WARNING CHIME
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL449X
OK or NG FE
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and lighting switch/daytime light
control unit MT
I Lighting switch
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-283
WARNING CHIME

SEL433X
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.

SEL913Y
OK or NG
EL-284
WARNING CHIME
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 (DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR
CHECK) NJEL0455S05
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL431X
OK or NG FE
OK © Door lock actuator assembly driver side is OK.
NG © GO TO 2. CL
2 CHECK DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR MT

1. Disconnect door lock actuator assembly driver side connector.
2. Check continuity between door lock actuator assembly driver side terminals 2 and 5.
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL988WD
ST
OK or NG
I Door lock actuator assembly driver side ground circuit RS
driver side
NG © Replace door lock actuator assembly driver side. BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-285
WARNING CHIME

Check voltage between time control unit terminal 1 or 9 and ground.
SEL447X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
I 15A fuse [No. 5, located in the fuse block (J/B)]

SEL430X
OK or NG
OK © System is OK.
NG © Check voltage between time control unit terminal 6 and body ground with disconnecting
door switch driver side.
If approx. 5V is supplied, GO TO 3.
If approx. 5V is not supplied, replace time control unit.
EL-286
WARNING CHIME

MA
EM
LC
SEL325WA
EC
OK or NG
I Door switch driver side ground circuit and condition FE
NG © Replace door switch driver side. CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-287
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER
System Description/Sedan

WIPER OPERATION NJEL0057S01
The wiper switch is controlled by a lever built into the combination switch.
There are three wiper switch positions:
I LO speed
I HI speed
I INT (Intermittent)
I to front wiper motor terminal 1.
Low and High Speed Wiper Operation NJEL0057S0101
Ground is supplied to wiper and washer switch terminal 17 through body grounds E30 and E73.
When the wiper switch is placed in the LO position, ground is supplied
I through terminal 14 of the front wiper and washer switch
I to front wiper motor terminal 3.
With power and ground supplied, the wiper motor operates at low speed.
When the wiper switch is placed in the HI position, ground is supplied
I to wiper motor terminal 2.
With power and ground supplied, the wiper motor operates at high speed.
Auto Stop Operation NJEL0057S0102
With wiper switch turned OFF, wiper motor will continue to operate until wiper arms reach windshield base.
When wiper arms are not located at base of windshield with wiper switch OFF, ground is provided
I from terminal 14 of the front wiper and washer switch
I to front wiper motor terminal 3, in order to continue wiper motor operation at low speed.
Ground is also supplied
I to front wiper motor terminal 6
I through terminal 4 of the front wiper motor, and
I through body grounds E30 and E73.
When wiper arms reach base of windshield, front wiper motor terminals 1 and 6 are connected instead of ter-
minals 4 and 6. Wiper motor will then stop wiper arms at the STOP position.
Intermittent Operation NJEL0057S0103
The front wiper motor operates the wiper arms one time at low speed at a set interval of approximately 1 to
13 seconds. This feature is controlled by the wiper amplifier (INT SW) combined with front wiper and washer
switch.
When the wiper switch is placed in the INT position, ground is supplied to wiper amplifier.
The desired interval time is input to wiper amplifier (INT VR) from wiper volume switch combined with front
wiper and washer switch.
Then intermittent ground is supplied
I through wiper amplifier (OUTPUT) and
I through terminal 14 of front wiper and washer switch
I to front wiper motor terminal 3
The wiper motor operates at low speed at the desired interval.
WASHER OPERATION NJEL0057S02
I to front washer motor terminal 1. (Except for Europe)
I to front washer motor terminal 1. (For Europe)
When the lever is pulled to the WASH position, ground is supplied
EL-288
I from body grounds E30 and E73
I through terminal 17 of the front wiper and washer switch, and
I through terminal 18 of the front wiper and washer switch GI
I to front washer motor terminal 2.
With power and ground supplied, the washer motor operates. MA
When the lever is pulled to the WASH position for one second or more, the wiper motor operates at low speed
for approximately 3 seconds to clean windshield. This feature is controlled by the wiper amplifier in the same
manner as the intermittent operation. EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-289
Wiring Diagram — WIPER —/Sedan
Wiring Diagram — WIPER —/Sedan NJEL0058
HEL390B
EL-290

WIPER OPERATION
The wiper switch is controlled by a lever built into the combination switch.
NJEL0456S01
GI
There are three wiper switch positions:
I LO speed MA
I HI speed
I INT (Intermittent)
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied EM
I to front wiper motor terminal 5 and front wiper relay terminal 2. LC
Low and High Speed Wiper Operation NJEL0456S0101
Ground is supplied to wiper and washer switch terminal 17 through body grounds E30 and E73. EC
When the wiper switch is placed in the LO position, ground is supplied
I to front wiper motor terminal 2. FE
With power and ground supplied, the wiper motor operates at low speed.
When the wiper switch is placed in the HI position, ground is supplied
CL
I to wiper motor terminal 1.
With power and ground supplied, the wiper motor operates at high speed. MT
Auto Stop Operation NJEL0456S0102
With wiper switch turned OFF, wiper motor will continue to operate until wiper arms reach windshield base. AT
When wiper arms are not located at base of windshield with wiper switch OFF, ground is provided
I from terminal 14 of the front wiper and washer switch
I to front wiper motor terminal 2, in order to continue wiper motor operation at low speed. AX
Ground is also supplied
I through terminal 13 of the front wiper and washer switch SU
I to front wiper relay terminal 3
I through terminal 4 of the front wiper relay.
I to front wiper motor terminal 3 BR
I through terminal 4 of front wiper motor
I through body grounds E30 and E73. ST
When wiper arms reach base of windshield, front wiper motor terminals 3 and 5 are connected instead of ter-
minals 3 and 4. Wiper motor will then stop wiper arms at the STOP position.
RS
Intermittent Operation NJEL0456S0103
The front wiper motor operates the wiper arms one time at low speed at a set interval of approximately 1 to
13 seconds. This feature is controlled by the wiper amplifier (INT SW) combined with front wiper switch. BT
When the wiper switch is placed in the INT position, ground is supplied to wiper amplifier (WIPER SW INT)
and (ACC).
The desired interval time is input to wiper amplifier (INT VR) from wiper volume switch combined with front HA
wiper and washer switch.
Then intermittent ground is supplied
I from body grounds E30 and E73 SC
I through terminal 5 of front wiper relay,
I through terminal 3 of front wiper relay,
I through terminal 13 of front wiper and washer switch and,
I through terminal 14 of front wiper and washer switch
I to terminal 2 of front wiper motor. IDX
The desired interval time is input
I to front wiper relay terminal 1
I from terminal 20 of front wiper and washer switch
EL-291
WASHER OPERATION NJEL0456S02
I to front wiper and washer switch terminal 5.
When the lever is pulled to the WASH/F position, ground is supplied
I from body grounds E30 and E73,
I through terminal 4 of the front wiper and washer switch, and
I to washer motor terminal 2.
With power and ground supplied, the washer motor operates.
When the lever is pulled to the WASH position for one second or more, the wiper motor operates at low speed
for approximately 3 seconds to clean windshield. This feature is controlled by the wiper amplifier in the same
manner as the intermittent operation.
EL-292
Wiring Diagram — WIPER —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — WIPER —/Hatchback NJEL0457
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL884L
EL-293
Wiring Diagram — WIPER —/Hatchback (Cont’d)
MEL885L
EL-294
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation NJEL0060

WIPER ARMS
1.
NJEL0060S01
Prior to wiper arm installation, turn on wiper switch to operate
GI
wiper motor and then turn it “OFF” (Auto Stop).
2. Lift the blade up and then set it down onto glass surface to set MA
the blade center to clearance “L1” & “L2” immediately before
tightening nut.
3. Eject washer fluid. Turn on wiper switch to operate wiper motor EM
and then turn it “OFF”.
4. Ensure that wiper blades stop within clearance “L1” & “L2”.
SEL543TA
Sedan LC
Clearance “L1”: 27.5 - 42.5 mm (1.083 - 1.673 in)
Clearance “L2”: 34.5 - 49.5 mm (1.358 - 1.949 in) EC
Hatchback
Clearance “L1”: 23 - 37 mm (0.91 - 1.46 in)
Clearance “L2”: 24 - 38 mm (0.94 - 1.50 in) FE
I Tighten wiper arm nuts to specified torque.
Front wiper: 21 - 26 N·m (2.1 - 2.7 kg-m, 16 - 19 ft-lb) CL
MT
I Before reinstalling wiper arm, clean up the pivot area as
illustrated. This will reduce possibility of wiper arm loose- AT
ness.
AX
SU
BR
SEL024J
WIPER LINKAGE NJEL0060S02 ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
GEL265
EL-295
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
SEL450XA
Removal NJEL0060S0201
1. Remove cowl top seal rubber and cowl top cover.
2. Remove wiper motor connector.
3. Remove 3 screws that secure wiper motor and wiper frame.
4. Detach wiper motor from wiper linkage at ball joint.
5. Remove wiper linkage.
Be careful not to break ball joint rubber boot.
Installation NJEL0060S0202
I Grease ball joint portion before installation.
1. Installation is the reverse order of removal.
Washer Nozzle Adjustment NJEL0061

I Adjust washer nozzle with suitable tool as shown in the figure
at left.
Adjustable range: ±10° (In any direction)
GEL013-A
EL-296
Washer Nozzle Adjustment (Cont’d)
Sedan
Unit: mm (in)
*1 400 (15.75) *5 151 (5.94) GI

*2 325 (12.80) *6 155 (6.10)
*3 425 (16.73) *7 250 (9.84)

MA
*4 226 (8.90) *8 380 (14.96)
EM
*A: The diameters of these circles are less than 80 mm (3.15 in).
*B: The diameter of this circle is less than 150 mm (5.91 in).
GEL266 *C: The diameter of this circle is less than 130 mm (5.12 in). LC
EC
FE
CL
GEL267
MT
HATCHBACK
Unit: mm (in) AT
*1 450 (17.72) *5 150 (5.91)
*2 225 (8.86) *6 155 (6.10) AX

*3 450 (17.72) *7 250 (9.84)
*4 225 (8.86) *8 380 (14.96) SU

*: The diameters of these circles are less than 80 mm (3.15 in).
The figure shown is for LHD models. BR
SEL544T The layout for RHD models is symmetrically opposite.
Washer Tube Layout NJEL0062 ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
GEL268
EL-297
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
Wiring Diagram — WIP/R —/Sedan
Wiring Diagram — WIP/R —/Sedan NJEL0300
HEL897A
EL-298
Wiring Diagram — WIP/R —/Sedan (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL898A
EL-299
Wiring Diagram — WIP/R —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — WIP/R —/Hatchback NJEL0458
MEL886L
EL-300
Wiring Diagram — WIP/R —/Hatchback (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL887L
EL-301
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation NJEL0301

WIPER ARMS NJEL0301S01
1. Prior to wiper arm installation, turn on wiper switch to operate
wiper motor and then turn it “OFF” (Auto Stop).
2. Lift the blade up and then set it down onto glass surface. Set
the black center to clearance “E” immediately before tighten-
ing the nut.
3. Eject washer fluid. Turn on wiper switch to operate wiper motor
and then turn it “OFF”.
4. Ensure that wiper blades stop on the lowest heat wire.
GEL269-C
I Tighten windshield wiper arm nuts to specified torque.
: 12.7 - 17.6 N·m (1.3 - 1.8 kg-m, 10 - 13 ft-lb)
SEL451XB
I Before reinstalling wiper arm, clean up the pivot area as

illustrated. This will reduce possibility of wiper arm loose-
ness.
SEL024J
Washer Nozzle Adjustment NJEL0302

I Adjust washer nozzle with suitable tool as shown in the figure
at left.
Adjustable range: ±15° (In any direction)
GEL270
Unit: mm (in)
*1 235 (9.25)
*2 190 (7.48)
*: The diameter of this circle is less than 60 mm (2.36 in).
GEL271
EL-302
Washer Nozzle Adjustment (Cont’d)
The diameter of the washer spit circle is less than 30 mm (1.18 in).
GI
MA
EM
SEL452XA LC
Washer Tube Layout NJEL0303
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
GEL272
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEL453X IDX
EL-303
HEADLAMP WASHER
Wiring Diagram — HLC —/Sedan
Wiring Diagram — HLC —/Sedan NJEL0375
HEL391B
EL-304
HEADLAMP WASHER
Wiring Diagram — HLC —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — HLC —/Hatchback NJEL0459
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL888L
EL-305
HEADLAMP WASHER
Washer Tube Layout
Washer Tube Layout NJEL0376
SEL494X
SEL454X
EL-306
HORN
Wiring Diagram — HORN —/Sedan
Wiring Diagram — HORN —/Sedan NJEL0071
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
GEL340A
EL-307
HORN
Wiring Diagram — HORN —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — HORN —/Hatchback NJEL0460
MEL889L
EL-308
CIGARETTE LIGHTER
Wiring Diagram — CIGAR —/Sedan
Wiring Diagram — CIGAR —/Sedan NJEL0156
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
GEL341A
EL-309
CIGARETTE LIGHTER
Wiring Diagram — CIGAR —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — CIGAR —/Hatchback NJEL0461
MEL188M
EL-310
CLOCK
Wiring Diagram — CLOCK —/Sedan Except for Europe
Wiring Diagram — CLOCK —/Sedan Except for

Europe NJEL0166
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
GEL342A
EL-311
CLOCK
Wiring Diagram — CLOCK —/Sedan for Europe
Wiring Diagram — CLOCK —/Sedan for Europe

NJEL0377
HEL394B
EL-312
CLOCK
Wiring Diagram — CLOCK —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — CLOCK —/Hatchback NJEL0462
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL189M
EL-313
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
System Description/With Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe
System Description/With Multi-remote Control

System Except for Europe =NJEL0073
The rear window defogger system is controlled by the smart entrance control unit. The rear window defogger
operates only for approximately 15 minutes.
I to rear window defogger relay terminal 3 (LHD models) or 5 (RHD models) and
I to rear window defogger relay terminal 6 (LHD models).
I to the rear window defogger relay terminal 1 and
LHD models:
Ground is supplied to terminal 6 of the rear window defogger switch (without auto A/C except for Israel), ter-
minal 5 of the rear window defogger switch (without auto A/C for Israel) or terminal 3 of the A/C auto amp.
(with auto A/C) through body grounds M28 and M67.
When the rear window defogger switch is turned ON, ground is supplied
I through terminal 4 of the rear window defogger switch (without auto A/C except for Israel), terminal 3 of
the rear window defogger switch (without auto A/C for Israel) or terminal 36 of the A/C auto amp. (with
auto A/C)
RHD models:
Ground is supplied to terminal 6 of heater control panel (without auto A/C), terminal 2 of rear window defog-
ger switch (with auto A/C with digital display) or terminal 3 of the A/C auto amp. (with auto A/C without digital
display) through body grounds M28 and M67.
I through terminal 4 of the heater control panel (without auto A/C), terminal 1 of rear window defogger switch
(with auto A/C with digital display) or terminal 36 of the A/C auto amp. (with auto A/C without digital dis-
play)
Terminal 2 of the smart entrance control unit then supplies ground to the rear window defogger relay termi-
nal 2.
With power and ground supplied, the rear window defogger relay is energized.
Power is supplied
I through terminals 5 and 7 of the rear window defogger relay (LHD models) or,
I through terminal 3 of the rear window defogger relay (RHD model)
I to the rear window defogger and door mirror defogger.
The rear window defogger has an independent ground.
With power and ground supplied, the rear window defogger filaments heat and defog the rear window.
When the system is activated, the rear window defogger indicator illuminates in the rear window defogger
switch.
EL-314
Wiring Diagram — DEF —/With Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe
Wiring Diagram — DEF —/With Multi-remote

Control System Except for Europe =NJEL0074
GI
LHD MODEL NJEL0074S01
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
GEL353A
EL-315
Wiring Diagram — DEF —/With Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe (Cont’d)
GEL343A
EL-316
RHD MODEL NJEL0074S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
GEL354A
EL-317
GEL344A
EL-318

“REAR DEFOGGER”
NJEL0218
GI
NJEL0218S01
EM
SEF094YA LC
EC
FE
CL
PBR455D
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL845W
6. Touch “REAR DEFOGGER”.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL846W

“DATA MONITOR” and “ACTIVE TEST” are available.
IDX
SEL322W
EL-319

“REAR DEFOGGER” NJEL0219S01
REAR DEF SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear window defogger switch.
This test is able to check rear window defogger operation. Rear window defogger activates
REAR DEFOGGER
when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
EL-320

GI
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE NJEL0075S01
SYMPTOM: Rear window defogger does not activate, or does
not go off after activating. MA
1 CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER OUTPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II EM
Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “REAR DEFOGGER” with CONSULT-II.
LC
EC
FE
CL
SEL353W
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. MT
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness terminal 2 and ground.
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL966W
OK or NG
ST
I Rear window defogger relay
(Refer to EL-347.) RS
I Rear window defogger circuit
I Rear window defogger filament
(Refer to EL-349.) BT
NG © GO TO 2.
HA
SC
IDX
EL-321
2 CHECK DEFOGGER RELAY COIL SIDE CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
3. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit terminal 2 and ground.
SEL967W
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
I Harness for open or short between fuse and rear window defogger relay
I Harness for open or short between rear window defogger relay and smart entrance
control unit
EL-322
3 CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II GI
Check rear window defogger switch input signal (“REAR DEF SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL352WA
Without CONSULT-II
Check continuity between smart entrance control unit terminal 39 and ground. FE
CL
MT
AT
SEL968W AX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. SU
I Rear window defogger switch
(Refer to EL-347.) BR
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and rear window defog-
ger switch
I Rear window defogger switch ground circuit ST
4 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND IGNITION INPUT SIGNAL RS

Check voltage between smart entrance control unit terminals 10 and 33 and ground.
BT
HA
SC
SEL338WC
OK or NG
IDX
OK © GO TO 5.
I 10A fuse [No. 10 or No. 37, located in the fuse block (J/B) or fusible link and fuse box]
EL-323
5 CHECK CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between smart entrance control unit terminal 16 and ground.
SEL836W
Yes © Replace smart entrance control unit.

No © Repair harness or connectors.
EL-324
System Description/Without Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe

Control System Except for Europe
The rear window defogger system is controlled by the time control unit. The rear window defogger operates
=NJEL0330
GI
only for approximately 15 minutes.
Power is supplied at all times MA
I to rear window defogger relay terminal 3 or 5.
I through 10A fuse [No. 13, located in the fuse block (J/B)] EM
I to rear window defogger relay terminal 6, and
I through 30A fuse (letter E, located in the fusible link and fuse box) (with power door lock), or LC
I through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)] (without power door lock)
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied EC
I to the rear window defogger relay terminal 1 and FE
LHD models:
Ground is supplied to terminal 6 of the rear window defogger switch (without auto A/C) or terminal 3 of the CL
A/C auto amp. (with auto A/C) through body grounds M28 and M67.
I through terminal 4 of the rear window defogger switch (without auto A/C) or terminal 36 of the A/C auto MT
amp. (with auto A/C)
I to time control unit terminal 13. AT
RHD models:
Ground is supplied to terminal 6 of heater control panel (without auto A/C), terminal 2 of rear window defog-
ger switch (with auto A/C with digital display) or terminal 3 of the A/C auto amp. (with auto A/C without digital AX
display) through body grounds M28 and M67.
I through terminal 4 of the heater control panel (without auto A/C), terminal 1 of rear window defogger switch SU
(with auto A/C with digital display) or terminal 36 of the A/C auto amp. (with auto A/C without digital dis-
play)
I to time control unit terminal 13. BR
Terminal 8 of time control unit then supplies ground to the rear window defogger relay terminal 2.
With power and ground supplied, the rear window defogger relay is energized. ST
Power is supplied
I through terminals 5 and 7 or terminal 3 of the rear window defogger relay (LHD models) and
I through terminal 3 to the rear window defogger relay (RHD models) RS
I to the rear window defogger and door mirror defogger (with door mirror defogger).
The rear window defogger has an independent ground. BT
switch. HA
SC
IDX
EL-325
Wiring Diagram — DEF —/Without Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe
Wiring Diagram — DEF —/Without Multi-remote

Control System Except for Europe =NJEL0331
LHD MODEL NJEL0331S01
HEL481B
EL-326
Wiring Diagram — DEF —/Without Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL907A
EL-327
RHD MODEL NJEL0331S02
GEL355A
EL-328
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
GEL345A
EL-329

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE NJEL0332S01
not go off after activating.
1 CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER OUTPUT SIGNAL
2. Check voltage between time control unit terminal 8 and ground.
SEL972W
OK or NG
(Refer to EL-347.)
I Rear window defogger filament
(Refer to EL-349.)
NG © GO TO 2.

1. Disconnect time control unit connector.
SEL973W
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
I Harness for open or short between fuse and rear window defogger relay
I Harness for open or short between rear window defogger relay and time control unit
EL-330

Check continuity between time control unit terminal 13 and ground. GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL974WA
EC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
FE
(Refer to EL-347.) CL
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and rear window defogger switch
I Rear window defogger switch ground circuit
MT
4 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND IGNITION INPUT SIGNAL
Check voltage between time control unit terminals 14 and 18 and ground. AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL806WB
ST
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
RS
I 10A fuse [No. 10 or No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I 30A fusible link (letter E, located in the fusible link and fuse box) BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-331

Check continuity between time control unit terminal 16 and ground.
SEL841W
Yes © Replace time control unit.

EL-332
System Description/Sedan for Europe
System Description/Sedan for Europe =NJEL0378

LHD MODELS NJEL0378S01
GI
Power is supplied at all times MA
I to rear window defogger relay terminal 3
I to rear window defogger relay terminal 6
I through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)] LC
I through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)] EC
I to time control unit terminal 17. FE
Ground is supplied
I to terminal 5 of the rear window defogger switch. CL
I through terminal 3 of the rear window defogger switch MT
With power and ground supplied, the rear window defogger relay is energized. AT
Power is supplied
I through terminals 5 and 7 of the rear window defogger relay AX
I to the rear window defogger and door mirror defogger.
With power and ground supplied, the rear window defogger filaments heat and defog the rear window. SU
switch.
BR
RHD MODELS NJEL0378S02
only for approximately 15 minutes. ST
I to rear window defogger relay terminal 5 RS
I to time control unit terminal 1. BT
I to the rear window defogger relay terminal 1 and HA
Ground is supplied SC
I to terminal 5 of the rear window defogger switch.
I through terminal 3 of the rear window defogger switch
I to time control unit terminal 35. IDX
Power is supplied
I through terminal 3 of the rear window defogger relay and
EL-333
I to the rear window defogger.
switch.
EL-334
Wiring Diagram — DEF —/Sedan for Europe
Wiring Diagram — DEF —/Sedan for Europe =NJEL0379

GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL052B
EL-335
Wiring Diagram — DEF —/Sedan for Europe (Cont’d)
HEL053B
EL-336
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL395B
EL-337
HEL396B
EL-338

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
NJEL0380S01
GI
1 CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER OUTPUT SIGNAL MA
2. Check voltage between time control unit harness terminal 27 and ground.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL994W
CL
OK or NG
I Rear window defogger relay MT
(Refer to EL-347.)
I Rear window defogger filament AT
(Refer to EL-349.)
NG © GO TO 2.
AX
SU
1. Disconnect control unit connector.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL995W
HA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
SC
I Harness for open or short between 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
and rear window defogger relay
IDX
EL-339

SEL996W
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
(Refer to EL-347.)

Check voltage between time control unit terminals 1 and 17 and ground.
SEL914Y
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
I 10A fuse [No. 10 or No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
EL-340

MA
EM
LC
SEL915Y EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-341
System Description/Hatchback =NJEL0463

I to rear window defogger relay terminal 5 (B7 relay models) or 3 (B6 relay models)
I to rear window defogger relay terminal 6 (B6 relay models).
Ground is supplied to terminal 5 of the rear window defogger switch through body grounds M28 and M67.
I through terminal 3 of the rear window defogger switch
Power is supplied
I through terminals 5 and 7 of the rear window defogger relay (B6 relay models) or
I through terminal 3 of the rear window defogger relay (B7 relay models)
I to the rear window defogger (B7 relay models) or
I to the rear window defogger and door mirror defogger. (B6 relay models)
switch.
EL-342
Wiring Diagram — DEF —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — DEF —/Hatchback =NJEL0464
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL891L
EL-343
Wiring Diagram — DEF —/Hatchback (Cont’d)
MEL892L
EL-344

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
NJEL0465S01
GI
1 CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER OUTPUT SIGNAL MA
2. Check voltage between time control unit harness terminal 13 and ground.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL455X
CL
OK or NG
I Rear window defogger relay MT
(Refer to EL-347.)
I Rear window defogger filament AT
(Refer to EL-349.)
NG © GO TO 2.
AX
SU
1. Disconnect time control unit connector.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL456X
HA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
SC
I Harness for open or short between 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
and rear window defogger relay
IDX
EL-345

SEL457X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
(Refer to EL-347.)

Check voltage between time control unit terminals 1 or 9 and ground.
SEL447X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
I 10A fuse or 15A fuse [No. 10 or No. 5, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
EL-346

MA
EM
LC
SEL448X
EC
FE
CL
MT
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY AT
NJEL0076S01
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7.
Condition Continuity AX
12V direct current supply between ter-
Yes
minals 1 and 2 SU
No current supply No
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL970W
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH NJEL0076S02

SC
Check continuity between terminals when rear window defogger
switch is pushed and released.
EXCEPT FOR EUROPE
Terminals Condition Continuity
IDX
Rear window defogger
Yes
4-6 switch is pushed.
3-5 Rear window defogger
No
switch is released.
SEL916Y
EL-347
Electrical Components Inspection (Cont’d)
FOR EUROPE

Yes
switch is pushed.
3-5
No
switch is released.
SEL500X
WITH AUTO A/C WITH DIGITAL DISPLAY NJEL0076S03

Yes
switch is pushed.
1-2
No
switch is released.
SEL493Y
EL-348
Filament Check
Filament Check =NJEL0077

1. Attach probe circuit tester (in volt range) to middle portion of
each filament. GI
MA
EM
SEL263 LC
I When measuring voltage, wrap tin foil around the top of
the negative probe. Then press the foil against the wire
with your finger. EC
FE
CL
SEL122R
MT
2. If a filament is burned out, circuit tester registers 0 or 12 volts.
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL265
3. To locate burned out point, move probe to left and right along SC
filament. Test needle will swing abruptly when probe passes
the point.
IDX
SEL266
EL-349
Filament Repair
Filament Repair NJEL0078

REPAIR EQUIPMENT NJEL0078S01
1) Conductive silver composition (Dupont No. 4817 or equivalent)
2) Ruler 30 cm (11.8 in) long
3) Drawing pen
4) Heat gun
5) Alcohol
6) Cloth
REPAIRING PROCEDURE NJEL0078S02

1. Wipe broken heat wire and its surrounding area clean with a
cloth dampened in alcohol.
2. Apply a small amount of conductive silver composition to tip of
drawing pen.
Shake silver composition container before use.
3. Place ruler on glass along broken line. Deposit conductive sil-
ver composition on break with drawing pen. Slightly overlap
existing heat wire on both sides [preferably 5 mm (0.20 in)] of
the break.
BE540
4. After repair has been completed, check repaired wire for con-
tinuity. This check should be conducted 10 minutes after silver
composition is deposited.
Do not touch repaired area while test is being conducted.
SEL012D
5. Apply a constant stream of hot air directly to the repaired area

for approximately 20 minutes with a heat gun. A minimum dis-
tance of 3 cm (1.2 in) should be kept between repaired area
and hot air outlet. If a heat gun is not available, let the repaired
area dry for 24 hours.
SEL013D
EL-350
AUDIO
System Description/Except for Europe
System Description/Except for Europe NJEL0079

Refer to Owner’s Manual for audio system operating instructions.
Power is supplied at all times GI
I to audio unit terminal 6 and MA
I to CD deck terminal 24 (with CD deck).
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
I to audio unit terminal 10 and
I to CD deck terminal 21 (with CD deck). LC
Ground is supplied through the case of the audio unit.
Audio signals are supplied
I through audio unit terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 13, 14, 15 and 16 EC
I to terminals 1 and 2 of door speaker LH and RH,
I to terminals 1 and 2 of rear speaker LH and RH and FE
I to terminals 1 and 2 of pillar speaker LH and RH (with 6 speakers)
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-351
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —/Except for Europe
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —/Except for Europe

NJEL0081
BASE SYSTEM FOR LHD MODELS NJEL0081S05
HEL910A
EL-352
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —/Except for Europe (Cont’d)
BASE SYSTEM FOR RHD MODELS NJEL0081S06
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL911A
EL-353
AUDIO
WITH 6-SPEAKERS NJEL0081S08
HEL912A
EL-354
AUDIO
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL913A
EL-355
AUDIO
Trouble Diagnoses/Except for Europe
Trouble Diagnoses/Except for Europe NJEL0220
Audio unit inoperative (no 1. 15A fuse 1. Check 15A fuse [No. 1, located in fuse block (J/B)].
digital display and no 2. Poor audio unit case ground Turn ignition switch ACC or ON and verify that bat-
sound from speakers). 3. Audio unit tery positive voltage is present at terminal 10 of
audio unit.
2. Check audio unit case ground.
3. Remove audio unit for repair.
Audio unit presets are lost 1. 15A fuse 1. Check 15A fuse (No. 32, located in fusible link and
when ignition switch is 2. Audio unit fuse box) and verify that battery positive voltage is
turned OFF. present at terminal 6 of audio unit.
Individual speaker is noisy 1. Speaker 1. Check speaker.

or inoperative. 2. Audio unit output 2. Check audio unit output voltages.
3. Speaker circuit 3. Check wires for open or short between audio unit
4. Audio unit and speaker.
AM/FM stations are weak 1. Antenna 1. Check antenna.

or noisy. 2. Audio unit ground 2. Check audio unit ground condition.
3. Audio unit 3. Remove audio unit for repair.
Audio unit generates noise 1. Poor audio unit ground 1. Check audio unit ground.
in AM and FM modes with 2. Loose or missing ground bonding straps 2. Check ground bonding straps.
engine running. 3. Ignition condenser or rear window defog- 3. Replace ignition condenser or rear window defogger
ger noise suppressor condenser noise suppressor condenser.
4. Ignition coil or secondary wiring 4. Check ignition coil and secondary wiring.
in AM and FM modes with 2. Antenna 2. Check antenna.
accessories on (switch 3. Accessory ground 3. Check accessory ground.
pops and motor noise). 4. Faulty accessory 4. Replace accessory.
EL-356
AUDIO

Power is supplied at all times GI
I through 15A fuse (No. 32, located in the fusible link and fuse block)
I to audio unit terminal 9 MA
I to CD auto changer terminal 32.
I to audio unit terminal 3,
I to CD auto changer terminal 36 LC
I through audio unit terminals 7, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16 EC
I to terminals 1 and 2 of front speaker LH and RH,
I to terminals 1 and 2 of rear speaker LH and RH and FE
I to terminals 1 and 2 of pillar tweeter LH and RH (with 6 speakers)
When the navigation system is triggered,
power is supplied CL
I through navi control unit terminal 46
I to speaker relay terminal 2 MT
Ground is supplied
I to speaker relay terminal 1 AT
With power and ground supplied, the relay is energized, and then audio signal is interrupted to front door
speaker RH (LHD models) or LH (RHD models), and pillar tweeter RH (LHD models) or LH (RHD models) AX
For detailed, refer to “NAVIGATION SYSTEM”.
NATS AUDIO LINK
Description
NJEL0381S04
SU
NJEL0381S0401
The link with the NATS IMMU implies that the audio unit can basically only be operated if connected to the
matching NATS IMMU to which the audio unit was initially fitted on the production line. BR
Since radio operation is impossible after the link with the NATS is disrupted theft of the audio unit is basically
useless since special equipment is required to reset the audio unit.
Initialization process for audio units that are linked to the NATS IMMU ST
New audio units will be delivered to the factories in the “NEW” state, i.e. ready to be linked with the vehicle’s
NATS. When the audio unit in “NEW” state is first switched on at the factory, it will start up communication
with the vehicle’s immobilizer control unit (IMMU) and send a code (the “audio unit Code”) to the IMMU. The RS
IMMU will then store this code, which is unique to each audio unit, in its (permanent) memory.
Upon receipt of the code by the IMMU, the NATS will confirm correct receipt of the audio unit code to the audio
unit. Hereafter, the audio unit will operate as normal. BT
During the initialization process, “NEW” is displayed on the audio unit display. Normally though, communica-
tion between audio unit and IMMU takes such a short time (300 ms) that the audio unit seems to switch on
directly without showing “NEW” on its display. HA
Normal operation
Each time the audio unit is switched on afterwards, the audio unit code will be verified between the audio unit
and the NATS before the audio unit becomes operational. During the code verification process, “WAIT” is SC
shown on the audio unit display. Again, the communication takes such a short time (300 ms) that the audio
unit seems to switch on directly without showing “WAIT” on its display.
When the radio is locked
In case of a audio unit being linked with the vehicle’s NATS (immobilizer system), disconnection of the link
between the audio unit and the IMMU will cause the audio unit to switch into the lock (“SECURE”) mode in
which the audio unit is fully inoperative. Hence, repair of the audio unit is basically impossible, unless the audio IDX
unit is reset to the “NEW” state for which special decoding equipment is required.
Clarion has provided their authorized service representatives with so called “decoder boxes” which can bring
the audio unit back to the “NEW” state, enabling the audio unit to be switched on after which repair can be
carried out. Subsequently, when the repaired audio unit is delivered to the final user again, it will be in the
EL-357
AUDIO
“NEW” state as to enable re-linking the audio unit to the vehicle’s immobilizer system. As a result of the above,
repair of the audio unit can only be done by an authorized Clarion representative (when the owner of the
vehicle requests repair and can show personal identification).
Service Procedure NJEL0381S0402
Item Service procedure Description
Battery disconnection No additional action required. —
Radio needs repair Repair needs to be done by authorized

representative of radio manufacturer since
radio cannot be operated unless it is reset —
to NEW state, using special decoding
equipment.
Replacement of radio by new part No additional action required. Radio is delivered in NEW state.
Transferring radio to another vehicle/ Radio needs to be reset to NEW state by

replacement of radio by an “old” part authorized representative of radio manu- —
facturer.
Replacement of IMMU Radio needs to be reset to NEW state by After switching on the radio, it will display
authorized representative of Clarion. “SECURE” after 1 minute.
No communication from IMMU to radio 1. If NATS is malfunctioning, check NATS After switching on the radio, the radio will
system. display “SECURE” after 1 minute. Further
2. After NATS is repaired, reset radio to use of radios impossible until communica-
NEW state by authorized representation is established again, or after radio is
tive of Clarion. reset by authorized representative of
Clarion.
When initialized between ECM and IMMU. Radio needs to be reset to NEW status After switching on the radio, it will display
by authorized representative of Clarion. “SECURE” after 1 minute.
SPEED DEPENDENT VOLUME CONTROL NJEL0381S06

Description NJEL0381S0601
If activated, the radio output volume will be automatically adjusted to compensate for increasing driving noises
at higher driving speeds.
The radio receives a speed signal from the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) and selects the output volume.
PERSONAL AUDIO SETTINGS NJEL0381S07
The radio is designed to store several settings (volume, bass, treble, preset stations and level of speed
dependent volume control) with every NATS ignition key used. Up to a maximum of 4 NATS keys can be reg-
istered. During the communication as mentioned under “Anti-Theft System”, the radio will recognize the used
ignition key and select the accompanying settings.
EL-358
AUDIO
Schematic/Sedan for Europe
Schematic/Sedan for Europe NJEL0382
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL397B
EL-359
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —/Sedan for Europe
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —/Sedan for Europe

NJEL0383
HEL398B
EL-360
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —/Sedan for Europe (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL399B
EL-361
AUDIO
HEL400B
EL-362
AUDIO
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL401B
EL-363
AUDIO
HEL402B
EL-364
AUDIO
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL403B
EL-365
AUDIO
HEL404B
EL-366
AUDIO
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL405B
EL-367
AUDIO
System Description/Hatchback for Europe
System Description/Hatchback for Europe =NJEL0497

I through 15A fuse (No. 32, located in the fusible link and fuse block)
I to audio unit terminal 9
I to CD auto changer terminal 32.
I to audio unit terminal 3,
I to CD auto changer terminal 36 and
I through audio unit terminals 7, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16
I to terminals 1 and 2 of front door speaker LH and RH,
I to terminals 1 and 2 of rear speaker LH and RH and
I to terminals 1 and 2 of pillar tweeter LH and RH (with 6 speakers)
When the navigation system is triggered,
power is supplied
I to speaker relay terminal 2
Ground is supplied
I to speaker relay terminal 1
With power and ground supplied, the relay is energized, and then audio signal is interrupted to front door
speaker RH (LHD models) or LH (RHD models), and pillar tweeter RH (LHD models) or LH (RHD models)
For detailed, refer to “NAVIGATION SYSTEM”.
NATS AUDIO LINK NJEL0497S01
The link with the NATS IMMU implies that the audio unit can basically only be operated if connected to the
matching NATS IMMU to which the audio unit was initially fitted on the production line.
Since radio operation is impossible after the link with the NATS is disrupted theft of the audio unit is basically
useless since special equipment is required to reset the audio unit.
Initialization process for audio units that are linked to the NATS IMMU
New audio units will be delivered to the factories in the “NEW” state, i.e. ready to be linked with the vehicle’s
NATS. When the audio unit in “NEW” state is first switched on at the factory, it will start up communication
with the vehicle’s immobilizer control unit (IMMU) and send a code (the “audio unit Code”) to the IMMU. The
IMMU will then store this code, which is unique to each audio unit, in its (permanent) memory.
Upon receipt of the code by the IMMU, the NATS will confirm correct receipt of the audio unit code to the audio
unit. Hereafter, the audio unit will operate as normal.
During the initialization process, “NEW” is displayed on the audio unit display. Normally though, communica-
tion between audio unit and IMMU takes such a short time (300 ms) that the audio unit seems to switch on
directly without showing “NEW” on its display.
Normal operation
Each time the audio unit is switched on afterwards, the audio unit code will be verified between the audio unit
and the NATS before the audio unit becomes operational. During the code verification process, “WAIT” is
shown on the audio unit display. Again, the communication takes such a short time (300 ms) that the audio
unit seems to switch on directly without showing “WAIT” on its display.
When the radio is locked
In case of a audio unit being linked with the vehicle’s NATS (immobilizer system), disconnection of the link
between the audio unit and the IMMU will cause the audio unit to switch into the lock (“SECURE”) mode in
which the audio unit is fully inoperative. Hence, repair of the audio unit is basically impossible, unless the audio
unit is reset to the “NEW” state for which special decoding equipment is required.
Clarion has provided their authorized service representatives with so called “decoder boxes” which can bring
the audio unit back to the “NEW” state, enabling the audio unit to be switched on after which repair can be
carried out. Subsequently, when the repaired audio unit is delivered to the final user again, it will be in the
EL-368
AUDIO
System Description/Hatchback for Europe (Cont’d)
“NEW” state as to enable re-linking the audio unit to the vehicle’s immobilizer system. As a result of the above,
repair of the audio unit can only be done by an authorized Clarion representative (when the owner of the
vehicle requests repair and can show personal identification). GI
Service Procedure NJEL0497S0102
Item Service procedure Description MA

Battery disconnection No additional action required. —
Radio needs repair Repair needs to be done by authorized

EM
representative of radio manufacturer since
radio cannot be operated unless it is reset —
to NEW state, using special decoding LC
equipment.
Replacement of radio by new part No additional action required. Radio is delivered in NEW state. EC
Transferring radio to another vehicle/ Radio needs to be reset to NEW state by
replacement of radio by an “old” part authorized representative of radio manu- —
facturer. FE
Replacement of IMMU Radio needs to be reset to NEW state by After switching on the radio, it will display
authorized representative of Clarion. “SECURE” after 1 minute. CL
No communication from IMMU to radio 1. If NATS is malfunctioning, check NATS After switching on the radio, the radio will
system. display “SECURE” after 1 minute. Further
2. After NATS is repaired, reset radio to use of radios impossible until communica- MT
NEW state by authorized representation is established again, or after radio is
tive of Clarion. reset by authorized representative of
Clarion. AT
When initialized between ECM and IMMU. Radio needs to be reset to NEW status After switching on the radio, it will display
by authorized representative of Clarion. “SECURE” after 1 minute.
AX
SPEED DEPENDENT VOLUME CONTROL NJEL0497S02
SU
If activated, the radio output volume will be automatically adjusted to compensate for increasing driving noises
at higher driving speeds.
The radio receives a speed signal from the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) and selects the output volume. BR
PERSONAL AUDIO SETTINGS NJEL0497S03
ST
The radio is designed to store several settings (volume, bass, treble, preset stations and level of speed
dependent volume control) with every NATS ignition key used. Up to a maximum of 4 NATS keys can be reg-
istered. During the communication as mentioned under “NATS audio link”, the radio will recognize the used RS
ignition key and select the accompanying settings.
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-369
AUDIO
Schematic/Hatchback
MEL893L
EL-370
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —/Hatchback NJEL0467
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL894L
EL-371
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —/Hatchback (Cont’d)
MEL895L
EL-372
AUDIO
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL896L
EL-373
AUDIO
MEL897L
EL-374
AUDIO
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL898L
EL-375
AUDIO
MEL899L
EL-376
AUDIO
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL900L
EL-377
AUDIO
MEL901L
EL-378
AUDIO
Trouble Diagnoses/For Europe
Trouble Diagnoses/For Europe NJEL0385

AUDIO UNIT NJEL0385S05
GI
Audio unit inoperative (no 1. 10A fuse 1. Check 10A fuse [No. 1, located in fuse block (J/B)]. MA
digital display and no 2. Poor audio unit case ground Turn ignition switch ACC or ON and verify that bat-
sound from speakers). 3. Audio unit tery positive voltage is present at terminal 3 of audio
unit.
2. Check audio unit case ground.
EM
Audio unit presets are lost 1. 15A fuse 1. Check 15A fuse (No. 32, located in fusible link and LC
when ignition switch is 2. Audio unit fuse box) and verify that battery positive voltage is
turned OFF. present at terminal 9 of audio unit.
2. Remove audio unit for repair. EC
Individual rear speaker is 1. Each speaker 1. Check speaker.
noisy or inoperative. 2. Output circuit to each speaker 2. Check the output circuits to each speaker
I between audio unit and each speaker. FE
AM/FM stations are weak 1. Roof antenna 1. Check roof antenna.
or noisy. 2. Audio unit ground 2. Check audio unit ground condition. CL
in AM and FM modes with 2. Loose or missing ground bonding straps 2. Check ground bonding straps. MT
engine running. 3. Ignition condenser or rear window defog- 3. Replace ignition condenser or rear window defogger
ger noise suppressor condenser noise suppressor condenser.
4. Ignition coil or secondary wiring 4. Check ignition coil and secondary wiring. AT
in AM and FM modes with 2. Antenna 2. Check antenna.
AX
accessories on (switch 3. Accessory ground 3. Check accessory ground.
pops and motor noise). 4. Faulty accessory 4. Replace accessory.
SU
CD AUTOCHANGER NJEL0385S06
Testing Magazines and Discs NJEL0385S0601 BR
1. Confirm discs are installed correctly into the magazine (not upside down).
2. Visually inspect/compare the customer’s discs with each other and other discs.
Identify any of the following conditions: ST
I Discs with a large outside diameter. [Normal size is 120 mm (4.72 in).]
I Discs with rough or lipped edges.
RS
I Discs with excessive thickness [Normal size is 1.2 mm (0.047 in).]
I Discs with scratches, abrasions, or pits on the surface.
I Discs with grease/oil, fingerprints, foreign material. BT
I Discs are warped due to excessive heat exposure.
3. Slide/place the discs in and out of the various magazine positions.
Identify any discs and/or positions that require additional force for placement/ejection. If interference HA
(sticking, excessive tensions) is found, replace the magazine or the discs.
NOTE: SC
I Discs which are marginally out of specification (ex. dirty, scratched and so on) may play correctly
on a home stereo.
However, when used in the automotive environment skipping may occur due to the added vehicle
movement and/or vibration due to road conditions. Autochangers should not be replaced when
discs are at fault.
I Use a soft damp cloth to wipe the discs starting from the center outward in radial direction. Never IDX
use chemical cleaning solutions to clean the discs.
EL-379
AUDIO
Inspection
Inspection =NJEL0221
AUDIO UNIT NJEL0221S01
All voltage inspections are made with:
I Ignition switch ON or ACC
I Audio unit ON
I Audio unit connected (If audio unit is removed for inspection, supply a ground to the case using a jumper
wire.)
ANTENNA NJEL0221S02
Using a jumper wire, clip an auxiliary ground between antenna and body.
I If reception improves, check antenna ground (at body surface).
I If reception does not improve, check main feeder cable for short circuit or open circuit.
EL-380
AUDIO ANTENNA
Wiring Diagram — P/ANT —
Wiring Diagram — P/ANT — NJEL0085
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL483B
EL-381
AUDIO ANTENNA
Location of Antenna/Power Antenna
Location of Antenna/Power Antenna NJEL0087
GEL274
Antenna Rod Replacement/Power Antenna NJEL0307

REMOVAL NJEL0307S01
1. Remove antenna nut and antenna base.
GEL275
2. Withdraw antenna rod while raising it by operating antenna

motor.
GEL276
EL-382
AUDIO ANTENNA
Antenna Rod Replacement/Power Antenna (Cont’d)
INSTALLATION NJEL0307S02
1. Lower antenna rod by operating antenna motor.
2. Insert gear section of antenna rope into place with it facing GI
toward antenna motor.
3. As soon as antenna rope is wound on antenna motor, stop
antenna motor. Insert antenna rod lower end into antenna
MA
motor pipe.
4. Retract antenna rod completely by operating antenna motor. EM
5. Install antenna nut and base.
LC
EC
FE
CL
GEL277
MT
Window Antenna Repair NJEL0250
ELEMENT CHECK AT
NJEL0250S01
1. Attach probe circuit tester (in ohm range) to antenna terminal
on each side. AX
If an element is OK, continuity should exist.
If an element is broken, no continuity should exist. Go to step
2. SU
BR
SEL250I
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-383
AUDIO ANTENNA
Window Antenna Repair (Cont’d)
I When measuring continuity, wrap tin foil around the top of
probe. Then press the foil against the wire with your fin-
ger.
SEL122R
SEL252I
2. To locate broken point, move probe along element. Tester

needle will swing abruptly when probe passes the point.
SEL253I
ELEMENT REPAIR NJEL0250S02

Refer to “Filament Repair”, “REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER” (EL-
349).
EL-384
AUDIO ANTENNA
Location of Antenna/Sedan With Manual Antenna
Location of Antenna/Sedan With Manual

Antenna NJEL0335
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
GEL273
MT
Antenna Rod Replacement/Sedan With Manual
Antenna AT
NJEL0336
REMOVAL NJEL0336S01
1. Loosen screws securing antenna base. AX
SU
BR
SEL242S
2. Pull out pipe with a drier makes it easier.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL243S
3. Cut off stopper at the end of the antenna rod using a file. SC
4. Pull out antenna rod from antenna base.
IDX
SEL244S
EL-385
AUDIO ANTENNA
Antenna Rod Replacement/Sedan With Manual Antenna (Cont’d)
5. Insert new antenna rod into antenna base.
6. Apply adhesive to screw thread and tighten screw.
SEL245S
7. Tighten screws to secure antenna base.
SEL246S
Location of Antenna/Hatchback NJEL0468
SEL466X
Antenna Rod Replacement/Hatchback NJEL0469

REMOVAL NJEL0469S01
1. Remove rear portion of head lining.
2. Remove antenna nut and antenna base.
SEL459X
EL-386
HEATED SEAT
Wiring Diagram — H/SEAT —/Sedan
Wiring Diagram — H/SEAT —/Sedan NJEL0388
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL070B
EL-387
HEATED SEAT
Wiring Diagram — H/SEAT —/Sedan (Cont’d)
HEL071B
EL-388
HEATED SEAT
Wiring Diagram — H/SEAT —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — H/SEAT —/Hatchback NJEL0471
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL914L
EL-389
HEATED SEAT
Wiring Diagram — H/SEAT —/Hatchback (Cont’d)
MEL915L
EL-390
POWER SUNROOF
Wiring Diagram — SROOF —
Wiring Diagram — SROOF — NJEL0089
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL911L
EL-391
POWER SUNROOF
Trouble Diagnoses
Power sunroof cannot be operated 1. 10A fuse, 30A fusible link and 1. Check 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block
using any switch. M4 circuit breaker (J/B)], 30A fusible link (letter E, located in fusible
2. Sunroof motor ground circuit link and fuse box) and M4 circuit breaker. Verify
3. Sunroof switch battery positive voltage is present at terminal 5 of
4. Sunroof switch circuit sunroof motor. And then turn ignition switch “ON”
5. Sunroof motor and verify battery positive voltage is present at ter-
minal 5 of sunroof switch.
2. Check sunroof motor ground circuit.
3. Check sunroof switch.
4. Check harness between sunroof switch and sunroof
motor.
5. Check sunroof motor.
Power sunroof cannot be operated 1. Sunroof switch 1. Check sunroof switch.

using one of the sunroof switches. 2. Sunroof switch circuit 2. Check the harness between sunroof motor and sun-
roof switch.
EL-392
DOOR MIRROR
Wiring Diagram — MIRROR —/LHD Models Except for Europe
Wiring Diagram — MIRROR —/LHD Models

Except for Europe NJEL0090
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL918A
EL-393
DOOR MIRROR
Wiring Diagram — MIRROR —/LHD Models Except for Europe (Cont’d)
HEL919A
EL-394
DOOR MIRROR
Wiring Diagram — MIRROR —/RHD Models Except for Europe
Wiring Diagram — MIRROR —/RHD Models

GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL920A
EL-395
DOOR MIRROR
Wiring Diagram — MIRROR —/RHD Models Except for Europe (Cont’d)
HEL921A
EL-396
DOOR MIRROR
Wiring Diagram — MIRROR —/Sedan for Europe
Wiring Diagram — MIRROR —/Sedan for

Europe NJEL0389
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL068B
EL-397
DOOR MIRROR
Wiring Diagram — MIRROR —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — MIRROR —/Hatchback NJEL0472
MEL912L
EL-398
DOOR MIRROR
Wiring Diagram — MIRROR —/Hatchback (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL913L
EL-399
TRUNK LID OPENER
Wiring Diagram — TLID —
Wiring Diagram — TLID — NJEL0312
HEL916A
EL-400
POWER WINDOW
System Description/Except for Europe

I from 30A fusible link (letter E, located in the fusible link and fuse box) GI
I through circuit breaker terminal 2 MA
I to power window relay terminal 5.
With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied
EM
I to power window relay terminal 1
Ground is supplied to power window relay terminal 2 LC
I through body grounds M28 and M67.
The power window relay is energized and power is supplied
EC
I through power window relay terminal 3
I to power window main switch terminal 1 and 4 (LHD models),
I to power window sub-switch (front passenger side) terminal 5, FE
I to power window sub-switch rear LH and rear RH terminals 5.
MANUAL OPERATION NJEL0191S01
CL
Front Door (Driver Side) NJEL0191S0101
Ground is supplied
MT
I to power window main switch terminal 3 and 2 (LHD models)
WINDOW UP AT
When the driver’s window switch in the power window main switch is pressed in the up position, power is
supplied
I to power window regulator (front driver side) terminal 2 AX
I through power window main switch terminal 9.
Ground is supplied SU
I to power window regulator (front driver side) terminal 1
Then, the motor raises the window until the switch is released.
BR
WINDOW DOWN
When the driver’s window switch in the power window main switch is pressed in the down position, power is ST
supplied
I through power window main switch terminal 8 RS
Ground is supplied
BT
I through power window main switch terminal 9
Then, the motor lowers the window until the switch is released.
Front Door (Passenger Side)
HA
NJEL0191S0102
Ground is supplied
I to power window main switch terminal 3 and 2 (LHD models) SC
NOTE:
Numbers in parentheses are terminal numbers, when power window switch is pressed in the UP and DOWN
positions respectively.
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH OPERATION IDX
Power is supplied
I through power window main switch (5, 6)
I to power window sub-switch (front passenger side) (3, 4).
EL-401
POWER WINDOW
System Description/Except for Europe (Cont’d)
The subsequent operation is the same as the front power window sub-switch operation.
FRONT POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH OPERATION
Power is supplied
I through power window sub-switch (front passenger side) (1, 2)
I to power window regulator (front passenger side) (1, 2).
Ground is supplied
I to power window regulator (front passenger side) (2, 1)
I through front power window sub-switch (front passenger side) (2, 1)
I to front power window sub-switch (front passenger side) (4, 3)
I through power window main switch (6, 5).
Then, the motor raises or lowers the window until the switch is released.
Rear Door NJEL0191S0103
Rear door windows will raise and lower in the same manner as passenger’s door window.
AUTO OPERATION NJEL0191S02
The power window AUTO feature enables the driver to open or close the driver’s window without holding the
window switch in the down or up position.
The AUTO feature operates on the driver’s window.
POWER WINDOW LOCK NJEL0191S03
The power window lock is designed to lock operation of all windows except for driver’s door window.
When the lock switch is pressed to lock position, ground of the sub-switches in the power window main switch
is disconnected. This prevents the power window motors from operating.
EL-402
POWER WINDOW
Schematic/Except for Europe
Schematic/Except for Europe NJEL0103
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL484B
EL-403
POWER WINDOW
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW —/LHD Models Except for Europe
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW —/LHD Models

HEL485B
EL-404
POWER WINDOW
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW —/LHD Models Except for Europe (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL924A
EL-405
POWER WINDOW
HEL925A
EL-406
POWER WINDOW
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL926A
EL-407
POWER WINDOW
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW —/RHD Models Except for Europe
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW —/RHD Models

HEL486B
EL-408
POWER WINDOW
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW —/RHD Models Except for Europe (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL928A
EL-409
POWER WINDOW
HEL929A
EL-410
POWER WINDOW
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL930A
EL-411
POWER WINDOW
Trouble Diagnoses/Except for Europe
None of the power windows can be 1. 10A fuse 1. Check 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)]
operated using any switch. 2. 30A fusible link, M4 circuit Turn ignition switch “ON” and verify battery positive
breaker voltage is present at terminal 1 of power window
3. Power window relay relay.
4. Open/short in power window 2. Check 30A fusible link (letter E, located in fusible
main switch circuit link and fuse box) and M4 circuit breaker. Verify bat-
5. Ground circuit tery positive voltage is present at terminal 5 of
6. Power window main switch power window relay.
3. Check power window relay.
4. Check L/W wire between power window relay and
power window main switch for open/short circuit.
5. Check the following:
a. Check ground circuit of power window main switch.
b. Check power window relay ground circuit.
6. Check power window main switch.
Driver side power window cannot 1. Driver side power window regu- 1. Check harness between power window main switch
be operated but other windows can lator circuit and driver side power window regulator for open or
be operated. 2. Driver side power window regu- short circuit.
lator 2. Check driver side power window regulator.
3. Open/short in power window 3. Check L/W wire between power window relay and
main switch circuit power window main switch for open/short circuit.
4. Power window main switch 4. Check power window main switch.
One or more power windows 1. Power window sub-switches 1. Check power window sub-switch.
except driver’s side window cannot 2. Power window regulators 2. Check power window regulator.
be operated. 3. Power window main switch 3. Check power window main switch.
4. Power window circuit 4. Check the following.
a. Check harness between the power window relay
terminal 3 and power window sub-switch terminal 5.
b. Check harnesses between power window main
switch and power window sub-switch for open/short
circuit.
c. Check harnesses between power window sub-switch
and power window regulator for open/short circuit.
Power windows except driver’s 1. Power window main switch 1. Check power window main switch.
side window cannot be operated
using power window main switch
but can be operated by power win-
dow sub-switch.
Driver side power window auto- 1. Power window main switch 1. Check power window main switch.
matic operation does not function
properly.
EL-412
POWER WINDOW

EM
EC
I to power window main switch terminal 1,
I to power window sub-switch (front passenger side) terminal 5, FE
I to power window sub-switch rear LH and rear RH terminals 5 (models with rear power window).
CL
Ground is supplied
MT
I to power window main switch terminal 3
WINDOW UP AT
supplied
I through power window main switch terminal 9 AX
I to power window regulator (front driver side) terminal 2.
BR
WINDOW DOWN
supplied
I to power window regulator (front driver side) terminal 1. RS
Ground is supplied
BT
HA
NJEL0391S0102
Ground is supplied
I to power window main switch terminal 3 SC
NOTE:
Power is supplied
EL-413
POWER WINDOW
Power is supplied
Ground is supplied
I to power window sub-switch (front passenger side) (4, 3)
The power window AUTO feature enables the driver to open or close the driver’s window without holding the
window switch in the down or up position.
EL-414
POWER WINDOW
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL406B
EL-415
POWER WINDOW
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW —/Sedan for Europe
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW —/Sedan for

Europe NJEL0393
HEL407B
EL-416
POWER WINDOW
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW —/Sedan for Europe (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL408B
EL-417
POWER WINDOW
HEL409B
EL-418
POWER WINDOW
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL410B
EL-419
POWER WINDOW
operated using any switch. 2. 30A fusible link, M4 circuit Turn ignition switch “ON” and verify positive battery
4. Ground circuit 2. Check 30A fusible link (letter E, located in fusible
5. Power window main switch link and fuse box) and M4 circuit breaker. Verify
positive battery voltage is present at terminal 5 of
power window relay.
circuit.
dow sub-switch.
properly.
EL-420
POWER WINDOW
System Description/Hatchback =NJEL0498

EM
EC
I to power window main switch terminal 1,
I to power window sub-switch terminal (front passenger side) 5, FE
I to power window sub-switch rear LH and rear RH terminals 5 (models with rear power window).
CL
Ground is supplied
MT
I to power window main switch terminal 3
WINDOW UP AT
supplied
I through power window main switch terminal 9 AX
BR
WINDOW DOWN
supplied
I to power window regulator (front driver side) terminal 2. RS
Ground is supplied
BT
HA
NJEL0498S0102
Ground is supplied
I to power window main switch terminal 3 SC
NOTE:
Power is supplied
EL-421
POWER WINDOW
Power is supplied
Ground is supplied
I to power window sub-switch (front passenger side) (4, 3)
The power window AUTO feature enables the driver to open the driver’s window without holding the window
switch in the down position.
EL-422
POWER WINDOW
Schematic/Hatchback
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL916L
EL-423
POWER WINDOW
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW —/Hatchback NJEL0500
MEL917L
EL-424
POWER WINDOW
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW —/Hatchback (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL918L
EL-425
POWER WINDOW
GEL513A
EL-426
POWER WINDOW
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL920L
EL-427
POWER WINDOW
operated using any switch. 2. 30A fusible link, M4 circuit Turn ignition switch “ON” and verify positive battery
4. Ground circuit 2. Check 30A fusible link (letter E, located in fusible
5. Power window main switch link and fuse box) and M4 circuit breaker. Verify
positive battery voltage is present at terminal 5 of
power window relay.
circuit.
dow sub-switch.
properly.
EL-428
POWER DOOR LOCK

GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SEL916W
SU
BR
System Description/With Multi-remote Control ST

OPERATION
NJEL0107S04
RS
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 10, and BT
I through 30A fusible link (letter E, located in the fusible link and fuse box)
Ground is supplied HA
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 16. SC
Lock and Unlock Switch Operation NJEL0107S0401
When lock and unlock switch is in LOCK position, ground is supplied
I through power window main switch (door lock and unlock switch) terminal 3
I through power window main switch (door lock and unlock switch) terminal 14 IDX
With power and ground supplied, doors are locked (Except driver’s door).
When lock and unlock switch is in UNLOCK position, ground is supplied
EL-429
POWER DOOR LOCK
With power and ground supplied, all doors are unlocked.
Driver’s Door Lock Knob Operation NJEL0107S0402
When driver’s door lock knob is in LOCK position, ground is interrupted
I through door lock actuator driver side (unlock sensor) terminal 4.
Then, all doors are locked.
When driver’s door lock knob is in UNLOCK position, ground is supplied
I through door lock actuator driver side (unlock sensor) terminal 4
Door Key Cylinder (Driver Side) Operation NJEL0107S0403
The door key cylinder (driver side) is connected to the unlock sensor (driver side) with a rod.
When the door key cylinder (driver side) is in LOCK position, the ground is interrupted
I through door lock actuator driver side (unlock sensor) terminal 4.
When the door key cylinder (driver side) is in UNLOCK position, the ground is supplied
With power and ground are supplied, all doors are unlocked.
When door key cylinder (driver side) is in LOCK position (With theft warning system), the ground is supplied
I through door key cylinder switch driver side terminal 2
I through door key cylinder switch driver side terminal 1
EL-430
POWER DOOR LOCK
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK —/With Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK —/With

GI
FIG. 1 NJEL0109S01
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL487B
EL-431
POWER DOOR LOCK
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK —/With Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe (Cont’d)
FIG. 2 NJEL0109S02
HEL932A
EL-432
POWER DOOR LOCK

“DOOR LOCK”
=NJEL0238
GI
NJEL0238S01
EM
SEF094YA LC
4. Turn “START”.
EC
FE
CL
PBR455D
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL845W
6. Touch “DOOR LOCK”.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL846W

“DATA MONITOR” and “ACTIVE TEST” are available.
IDX
SEL322W
EL-433
POWER DOOR LOCK

“DOOR LOCK” NJEL0239S01
LOCK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from lock/unlock switch.
UNLK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from lock/unlock switch.
LK BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from remote controller.
UN BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from remote controller.
LOCK SIG DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of driver’s door unlock sensor.
This test is able to check all door lock actuators lock operation. These actuators lock when
ALL D/LK MTR
“ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
This test is able to check door lock actuator driver side unlock operation. The actuator unlocks
DR D/UN MTR
This test is able to check door lock actuators (except door lock actuator driver side) unlock
NON DR D/UN
operation. These actuators unlock when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
EL-434
POWER DOOR LOCK

GI

MA
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK

EM
DOOR KEY CYLINDER (DRIVER SIDE) CHECK

LC
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK
(WITH THEFT WARNING SYSTEM)

EC
DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR CHECK
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CHECK

FE
CL
MT
SYMPTOM
AT
Specific door lock actuator does not operate. X X
Power door lock does not operate with door lock and
unlock switch on door trim.
X X AX
Power door lock does not operate with driver’s door
X X
lock knob operation. SU
Power door lock does not operate with driver’s door
X X X
key cylinder switch.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-435
POWER DOOR LOCK
=NJEL0193S02
Main Power Supply Circuit Check NJEL0193S0201
SEL190WB
SEL836W
EL-436
POWER DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK =NJEL0193S05
1 CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL GI

With CONSULT-II
Check door lock/unlock switch input signal (“LOCK SW DR/AS”/“UNLK SW DR/AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II. MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL341W FE
Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector .
2. Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 23 or 35 and ground. CL
MT
AT
AX
SEL912W SU
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-431.
OK or NG BR
OK © Door lock/unlock switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-437
POWER DOOR LOCK
2 CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH

1. Disconnect door lock/unlock switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between each door lock/unlock switch terminals.
I Power window main switch (Door lock/unlock switch)
SEL913W
OK or NG
I Ground circuit for door lock/unlock switch
I Harness for open or short between door lock/unlock switch and smart entrance control
unit connector
NG © Replace door lock/unlock switch.
EL-438
POWER DOOR LOCK
DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR CHECK =NJEL0193S11
1 CHECK DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL GI

With CONSULT-II
Check door unlock sensor input signal (“LOCK SIG DR”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL344WB
Without CONSULT-II
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SEL847W
SU
OK or NG
OK © Door unlock sensor is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.
BR
2 CHECK DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR ST

1. Disconnect door unlock sensor connector.
2. Check continuity between door unlock sensor terminals 4 and 2. RS
BT
HA
SC
SEL848W
OK or NG
I Door unlock sensor ground circuit IDX
EL-439
POWER DOOR LOCK
DOOR KEY CYLINDER (DRIVER SIDE) SWITCH CHECK
(WITH THEFT WARNING SYSTEM) =NJEL0193S12
1 CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (LOCK SIGNAL)

SEL935W
OK or NG
OK © Door key cylinder switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH

1. Disconnect door key cylinder switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between door key cylinder switch terminals 1 and 2.
SEL979W
OK or NG
I Door key cylinder switch ground circuit
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door key cylinder
switch
NG © Replace door key cylinder switch.
EL-440
POWER DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CHECK =NJEL0193S08
1 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR OPERATION GI

With CONSULT-II
1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “DOOR LOCK” with CONSULT-II.
2. Select “ALL D/LK MTR” and touch “ON”. MA
3. Then, select “DR D/UN MTR” and touch “ON”.
4. Select “NON DR D/UN” and touch “ON”.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL343W
NOTE: CL
If CONSULT-II is not available, skip this procedure and go to the next step.
OK or NG
MT
OK © Door lock actuator is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-441
POWER DOOR LOCK
2 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT

Check voltage for door lock actuator.
I Door lock actuator driver side
SEL817WB
I Door lock actuator passenger side and rear
SEL914W
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Replace smart entrance control unit. (Before replacing the control unit, perform “DOOR
LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK”.)
3 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

1. Disconnect door lock actuator harness connector.
2. Apply 12V direct current to door lock actuator and check operation.
SEL222WA
OK or NG
OK © Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit connector and door
lock actuator.
NG © Replace door lock actuator.
EL-442
POWER DOOR LOCK
System Description/Without Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe

GI
OPERATION NJEL0339S01
I through 30A fuse (letter E, located in the fusible link and fuse box) MA
Ground is supplied
EM
Lock and Unlock Switch Operation
LC
NJEL0339S0101
When lock and unlock switch is in LOCK position, ground is supplied
I from body grounds M28 and M67 EC
I through power window main switch (door lock/unlock switch) terminal 3
FE
With power and ground supplied, doors are locked (Except driver’s door).
When lock and unlock switch is in UNLOCK position, ground is supplied CL
I through power window main switch (door lock/unlock switch) terminal 7 MT
With power and ground supplied, all doors are unlocked. AT
Driver’s Door Lock Knob Operation NJEL0339S0102
When driver’s door lock knob is in LOCK position, ground is interrupted AX
I through door unlock sensor terminal 1.
Then, all doors are locked. SU
When driver’s door lock knob is in UNLOCK position, ground is supplied
I from body grounds M28 and M67 BR
I through door unlock sensor terminal 1
I through door unlock sensor terminal 2
I to time control unit terminal 9. ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-443
POWER DOOR LOCK
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK —/Without Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK —/Without Multi-

remote Control System Except for Europe NJEL0340
FIG. 1 NJEL0340S01
HEL488B
EL-444
POWER DOOR LOCK
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK —/Without Multi-remote Control System Except for Europe (Cont’d)
FIG. 2 NJEL0340S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL934A
EL-445
POWER DOOR LOCK

DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK
DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR CHECK
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CHECK

SYMPTOM
Power door lock does not operate with any switches. X X
Specific door lock actuator does not operate. X
Power door lock does not operate with door lock and unlock
X X
switch on door trim.
Power door lock does not operate with driver’s door lock knob
X X
operation.

NJEL0341S02
SEL815WA
EL-446
POWER DOOR LOCK
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL841W
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK NJEL0341S03

EC
1 CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
1. Disconnect time control unit harness connector. FE
2. Check continuity between time control unit harness connector terminal 11 or 19 and ground.
CL
MT
AT
AX
SEL915WA
OK or NG SU
NG © GO TO 2. BR
2 CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH ST

I Power window main switch (Door lock/unlock switch) RS
BT
HA
SC
SEL913W
OK or NG
OK © Check the following. IDX
I Harness for open or short between door lock/unlock switch and time control unit con-
nector
EL-447
POWER DOOR LOCK
DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR CHECK NJEL0341S04

SEL850W
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.

2. Check continuity between door unlock sensor terminals 1 and 2.
SEL910W
OK or NG
EL-448
POWER DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CHECK NJEL0341S05
1 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT GI

MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL917W
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-445. FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2. CL
NG © Replace time control unit. (Before replacing the control unit, perform “DOOR LOCK/
UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK”.)
MT
1. Disconnect door lock actuator harness connector. AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL222WB
OK or NG
RS
OK © Check harness for open or short between time control unit connector and door lock
actuator.
NG © Replace door lock actuator. BT
HA

SC
Power door lock/unlock operation by door key cylinder
I With the key inserted into front door key cylinder, turning it to LOCK will lock all doors.
I With the key inserted into front door key cylinder, turning it to UNLOCK will unlock all doors.
Power door lock/unlock operation by multi-remote controller (If equipped) IDX
I Pressing multi-remote controller LOCK button will lock all doors.
I Pressing multi-remote controller UNLOCK button once will unlock driver door. Then, if an unlock signal is
sent from the remote controller again within 5 seconds, all other doors will be unlocked.
Power door lock/unlock operation by lock/unlock switch
EL-449
POWER DOOR LOCK
I With lock/unlock switch on driver door trim setting to LOCK will lock all doors.
I With lock/unlock switch on driver door trim setting to UNLOCK will unlock all doors.
Key reminder system
I If the ignition key is in the ignition key cylinder and driver door is open, setting lock/unlock switch, lock
knob, key or multi-remote controller to “LOCK” locks the door once but then immediately unlocks all doors.
(signal from door unlock sensor driver side)
EL-450
POWER DOOR LOCK
NOTE:
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-451
POWER DOOR LOCK
Schematic/Hatchback
MEL221M
EL-452
POWER DOOR LOCK
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL222M
EL-453
POWER DOOR LOCK
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK —/Hatchback NJEL0504

FIG. 1 NJEL0504S01
MEL223M
EL-454
POWER DOOR LOCK
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK —/Hatchback (Cont’d)
FIG. 2 NJEL0504S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL224M
EL-455
POWER DOOR LOCK
FIG. 3 NJEL0504S03
MEL226M
EL-456
POWER DOOR LOCK
FIG. 4 NJEL0504S04
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL225M
EL-457
POWER DOOR LOCK
FIG. 5 NJEL0504S05
MEL227M
EL-458
POWER DOOR LOCK
FIG. 6 NJEL0504S06
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL228M
EL-459
POWER DOOR LOCK
FIG. 7 NJEL0504S07
MEL229M
EL-460
POWER DOOR LOCK

GI
REFERENCE PAGE (EL- ) 462 463 464 465 466 467 468
MA
Main power supply and ground circuit check

EM
Door key cylinder switch check

Door lock/unlock switch check
LC
Door unlock sensor check

Door lock actuator check
Door switch check

EC
Key switch check

FE
SYMPTOM
CL
Power door lock does not operate using any
1 X X
switch.
Power door lock does not operate with lock/ MT

2 X
unlock switch.
3
Power door lock does not operate with door key
X AT
cylinder switch.
4 Specific door lock actuator does not operate. X

AX
5 *Key reminder system does not operate. X X X
X: Applicable
*: Make sure the power door lock system operates properly.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-461
POWER DOOR LOCK
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK =NJEL0505S03
SEL467X
SEL448X
EL-462
POWER DOOR LOCK

1. Disconnect time control unit harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL468X
OK or NG
OK © Door lock/unlock switch is OK. CL
NG © GO TO 2.
MT
2. Check continuity between each door lock/unlock switch terminals. AT
I Power window main switch (Door lock/unlock switch) (With power window)
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL917Y
I Door lock/unlock switch (Without power window)
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEL469X
OK or NG
I Ground circuit for door lock/unlock switch IDX
nector
EL-463
POWER DOOR LOCK
DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK NJEL0505S05
1 CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (LOCK/UNLOCK SIGNAL)

Check voltage between time control unit harness connector terminals 28 or 29 and ground.
SEL470X
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.

2. Check continuity between door key cylinder switch terminals.
SEL471X
OK or NG
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and door key cylinder switch
EL-464
POWER DOOR LOCK
1 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR OUTPUT SIGNAL GI

I Door lock actuator driver’s side
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL472X
I Door lock actuator passenger side and rear FE
CL
MT
AT
SEL473X
AX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2. SU
UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK”.) BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-465
POWER DOOR LOCK

I Front and rear door
SEL918Y
I Back door
SEL491X
OK or NG
actuator.
DOOR SWITCH CHECK NJEL0505S08

SEL475X
OK or NG
OK © Door switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.
EL-466
POWER DOOR LOCK
2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH

1. Disconnect door switch harness connector. GI
2. Check continuity between door switch terminals.
MA
EM
LC
SEL325WA
EC
OK or NG
I Door switch ground circuit or door switch ground condition
CL
DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR CHECK NJEL0505S09 MT

Check voltage between time control unit terminal 35 or 36 and ground. AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL476X
ST
OK or NG
RS
NG © GO TO 2.
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-467
POWER DOOR LOCK

1. Disconnect door lock actuator assembly connector.
2. Check continuity between door lock actuator assembly terminals 2 and 4.
SEL919Y
OK or NG
KEY SWITCH (INSERT) CHECK NJEL0505S11

SEL433X
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.
EL-468
POWER DOOR LOCK

Check continuity between key switch terminals 1 and 2. GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL492X
EC
OK or NG
I 10A fuse [No. 12, located in fuse block (J/B)] FE
CL
System Description/Sedan for Europe NJEL0509

MT
Power door lock/unlock operation by door key cylinder
AT
I With the key inserted into front door key cylinder, turning it to LOCK will lock all doors.
I With the key inserted into front door key cylinder, turning it to UNLOCK will unlock all doors.
Power door lock/unlock operation by lock/unlock switch AX
I With lock/unlock switch setting to LOCK will lock all doors.
I With lock/unlock switch setting to UNLOCK will unlock all doors.
SU
Key reminder system
knob, key or multi-remote controller to “LOCK” locks the door once but then immediately unlocks all doors. BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-469
POWER DOOR LOCK
HEL411B
EL-470
POWER DOOR LOCK
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK —/Sedan for Europe
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK —/Sedan for

Europe NJEL0511
GI
FIG. 1 NJEL0511S01
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL412B
EL-471
POWER DOOR LOCK
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK —/Sedan for Europe (Cont’d)
FIG. 2 NJEL0511S02
HEL413B
EL-472
POWER DOOR LOCK
FIG. 3 NJEL0511S03
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL414B
EL-473
POWER DOOR LOCK
FIG. 4 NJEL0511S04
HEL415B
EL-474
POWER DOOR LOCK
FIG. 5 NJEL0511S05
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL455B
EL-475
POWER DOOR LOCK

REFERENCE PAGE (EL- ) 477 477 478 479 480 481 482


Door switch check
Key switch check

SYMPTOM
Power door lock does not operate using any

1 X X
switch.
Power door lock does not operate with lock/

2 X
unlock switch.
Power door lock does not operate with door key

3 X
cylinder switch.
4 Specific door lock actuator does not operate. X
5 *Key reminder system does not operate. X X X
X: Applicable
EL-476
POWER DOOR LOCK
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK =NJEL0512S03
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL006X
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEL992W
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK AX

NJEL0512S04

SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL022X
HA
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.
SC
IDX
EL-477
POWER DOOR LOCK

SEL019X
I (Without power window)
SEL020X
OK or NG
nector

SEL008X
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.
EL-478
POWER DOOR LOCK

1. Disconnect door key cylinder switch harness connector. GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL979W
EC
OK or NG
switch CL
MT

AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL009XA
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEL010XA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2. IDX
EL-479
POWER DOOR LOCK

SEL920Y
OK or NG
actuator.

Check voltage between time control unit harness connector terminals 30 and ground.
SEL986W
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.
EL-480
POWER DOOR LOCK
2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH

MA
EM
LC
SEL325WA
EC
OK or NG
CL

Check voltage between time control unit harness connector terminal 28 and ground. AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL987W
ST
OK or NG
RS
NG © GO TO 2.
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-481
POWER DOOR LOCK

1. Disconnect door lock actuator assembly driver side harness connector.
2. Check continuity between door lock actuator assembly driver side terminals.
SEL661XB
OK or NG
driver side

SEL990W
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.
EL-482
POWER DOOR LOCK

MA
EM
LC
SEL906Y EC
OK or NG
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-483
POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
System Description

OUTLINE NJEL0395S01
Power door lock system with super lock and key reminder is controlled by time control unit. Super lock has a
higher anti-theft performance than conventional power door lock systems.
When super lock is in released condition, lock knob operation locks or unlocks door.
When super lock is in set condition, lock knob operation cannot lock nor unlock door.
SEL831U
Power door lock/unlock and super lock set/release operation by door key cylinder
I With the key inserted into front door key cylinder, turning it to LOCK will lock all doors and set super lock.
(Super lock will not be set while key is inserted in the ignition key cylinder.)
I With the key inserted into front door key cylinder, turning it to UNLOCK will unlock all doors and release
super lock.
Power door lock/unlock and super lock set/release operation by multi-remote controller (If equipped)
I Pressing multi-remote controller LOCK button will lock all doors and set super lock. (Super lock will not be
set while key is inserted in the ignition key cylinder.)
I Pressing multi-remote controller UNLOCK button once will unlock driver door and release super lock. Then,
if an unlock signal is sent from the remote controller again within 5 seconds, all other doors will be
unlocked.
Power door lock and super lock release operation (by NATS IMMU signal)
I When the super lock is set, turning the ignition key switch to ON will release the super lock. All doors will
unlock once, but then immediately lock again.
Power door lock/unlock operation by lock/unlock switch
I With lock/unlock switch on driver door trim setting to LOCK will lock all doors.
I With lock/unlock switch on driver door trim setting to UNLOCK will unlock all doors.
Lock/unlock switch operation cannot control super lock.
Key reminder system
EL-484
System Description (Cont’d)
knob, key or multi-remote controller to “LOCK” locks the door once but then immediately unlocks all doors.
System initialization GI
I System initialization is required when battery cables are reconnected. Conduct the following to release
super lock once;
— insert the key into the ignition key cylinder and turn it to ON. MA
— LOCK/UNLOCK operation using door key cylinder or multi-remote controller.
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-485
Schematic/Sedan
HEL416B
EL-486
Wiring Diagram — S/LOCK —/Sedan
Wiring Diagram — S/LOCK —/Sedan NJEL0397

FIG. 1 NJEL0397S01
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL417B
EL-487
Wiring Diagram — S/LOCK —/Sedan (Cont’d)
FIG. 2 NJEL0397S02
HEL084B
EL-488
FIG. 3 NJEL0397S03
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL418B
EL-489
FIG. 4 NJEL0397S04
GEL514A
EL-490
FIG. 5 NJEL0397S05
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL456B
EL-491
FIG. 6 NJEL0397S06
HEL457B
EL-492

GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEL062X
IDX
After performing preliminary check, go to SYMPTOM CHART.
Before starting trouble diagnoses below, perform preliminary check, EL-493.
Symptom numbers in the symptom chart correspond with those of Preliminary check.
EL-493
REFERENCE PAGE (EL- ) 495 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504
Ignition switch “ON” circuit check

Remote controller signal check

NATS release signal check

Super lock actuator check

Door switch check
Key switch check

SYMPTOM
Power door lock does not operate

1 X X
using any switch.

2 X
with lock/unlock switch.

3 X
with door key cylinder switch.
Specific door lock actuator does

4 X
not operate.
Super lock cannot be set by door

5 X X X X
key cylinder.
*Super lock cannot be released

6 X X
by door key cylinder.

7 by ignition key switch. (Signal X X X
from NATS IMMU)
Specific super lock actuator does

8 X
not operate.
*Key reminder system does not

9 X X X
operate.
Super lock cannot be set/released

10 X
by using multi-remote controller.
X: Applicable
EL-494
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK NJEL0398S03
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL006X
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEL992W
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK AX

NJEL0398S04

SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL022X
HA
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.
SC
IDX
EL-495

SEL019X
I (Without power window)
SEL020X
OK or NG
nector

SEL008X
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.
EL-496

1. Disconnect door key cylinder switch harness connector. GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL979W
EC
OK or NG
switch CL
MT

AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL009XA
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEL010XA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2. IDX
EL-497

SEL921Y
OK or NG
actuator.
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR CHECK NJEL0398S07
1 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR

Check voltage for super lock actuator.
SEL013XB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Super lock actuator is OK.
EL-498
2 CHECK SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR

1. Disconnect door lock actuator assembly connector. GI
2. Set lever A in lock position.
3. Apply 12V direct current to door lock actuator assembly and check operation.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SEL014X
OK or NG AT
OK © Check harness between time control unit and super lock actuator.
NG © Replace super lock actuator. AX
SU
Check voltage between time control unit harness connector terminals 30 and ground.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL986W
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-489. HA
OK or NG
OK © Door switch is OK. SC
NG © GO TO 2.
IDX
EL-499
2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH

SEL325WA
OK or NG
DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR CHECK NJEL0398S13

SEL987W
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.
EL-500

1. Disconnect door lock actuator assembly driver side harness connector. GI
2. Check continuity between door lock actuator assembly driver side terminals.
MA
EM
LC
SEL988WD
EC
OK or NG
driver side CL
MT
NATS RELEASE SIGNAL CHECK NJEL0398S09
1 CHECK NATS SIGNAL CIRCUIT

AT
Disconnect time control unit connector and NATS IMMU connector.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL015X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
RS
NG © Repair harness.
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-501
2 CHECK NATS RELEASE SIGNAL

1. Connect time control unit connector and NATS IMMU connector.
SEL016XA
OK or NG
NG © Check NATS system.

SEL990W
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.
EL-502

MA
EM
LC
SEL906Y EC
OK or NG
CL
IGNITION SWITCH “ON” CIRCUIT CHECK NJEL0398S11

MT
Check voltage between time control unit terminal 18 and ground. AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL985W ST
OK or NG
OK © Ignition ON signal is OK. RS
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and fuse BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-503
REMOTE CONTROLLER SIGNAL CHECK NJEL0398S12
1 CHECK REMOTE CONTROLLER INPUT SIGNAL

1. Withdraw key from ignition key cylinder.
2. Check voltage between time control unit terminal 32 or 33 and ground.
SEL017XA
OK or NG
NG © Check harness for open or short between time control unit and multi-remote control unit.
EL-504
NOTE:
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-505
Schematic/Hatchback
MEL921L
EL-506
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL922L
EL-507
Wiring Diagram — S/LOCK —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — S/LOCK —/Hatchback NJEL0476

FIG. 1 NJEL0476S01
MEL923L
EL-508
Wiring Diagram — S/LOCK —/Hatchback (Cont’d)
FIG. 3 NJEL0476S03
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL926L
EL-509
FIG. 4 NJEL0476S04
MEL925L
EL-510
FIG. 5 NJEL0476S05
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL927L
EL-511
FIG. 6 NJEL0476S06
MEL928L
EL-512
FIG. 7 NJEL0476S07
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL930L
EL-513
FIG. 8 NJEL0476S08
MEL931L
EL-514

GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEL062X
IDX
After performing preliminary check, go to SYMPTOM CHART.
Before starting trouble diagnoses below, perform preliminary check, EL-515.
Symptom numbers in the symptom chart correspond with those of Preliminary check.
EL-515
REFERENCE PAGE (EL- ) 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527
Ignition switch “ON” circuit check

Remote controller signal check

NATS release signal check

Super lock actuator check

Door switch check
Key switch check

SYMPTOM

1 X X
using any switch.

2 X
with lock/unlock switch.

3 X
with door key cylinder switch.
Specific door lock actuator does

4 X
not operate.
Super lock cannot be set by door

5 X X X X
key cylinder.

6 X X
by door key cylinder.

7 by ignition key switch. (Signal X X X
from NATS IMMU)
Specific super lock actuator does

8 X
not operate.
*Key reminder system does not

9 X X X
operate.
Super lock cannot be set/released

10 X
by using multi-remote controller.
X: Applicable
EL-516
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK NJEL0477S03
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL467X
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEL448X
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-517

SEL468X
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.

SEL922Y
I Door lock/unlock switch (Without power window)
SEL469X
OK or NG
nector
EL-518
1 CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (LOCK/UNLOCK SIGNAL) GI

MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL470X
OK or NG FE
NG © GO TO 2. CL
2 CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH MT

2. Check continuity between door key cylinder switch terminals.
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL471X
OK or NG
ST
I Door key cylinder switch ground circuit RS
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and door key cylinder switch
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-519
1 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR OUTPUT SIGNAL

SEL472X
I Door lock actuator passenger side, rear and back
SEL473X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
EL-520

1. Disconnect door lock actuator harness connector. GI
I Front and rear door
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL490XA
I Back door
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEL491X
AX
OK or NG
actuator. SU
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR CHECK BR

NJEL0477S07
1 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR

ST
Check voltage for super lock actuator.
RS
BT
HA
SEL474X
SC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace time control unit. (Before replacing the unit, perform “DOOR KEY CYLINDER IDX
SWITCH CHECK”.)
EL-521
2 CHECK SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR

1. Disconnect door lock actuator assembly connector.
2. Set lever A in lock position.
3. Apply 12V direct current to door lock actuator assembly and check operation.
SEL014XB
OK or NG
OK © Check harness for open or short between time control unit and super lock actuator.
NG © Replace super lock actuator.

SEL475X
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.
EL-522
2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH

MA
EM
LC
SEL325WA
EC
OK or NG
CL

Check voltage between time control unit terminal 35 or 36 and ground. AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL476X
ST
OK or NG
RS
NG © GO TO 2.
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-523

2. Check continuity between door unlock sensor terminals 2 and 5.
SEL477X
OK or NG
NATS RELEASE SIGNAL CHECK NJEL0477S09
1 CHECK NATS SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect battery cable (−) terminal.
2. Disconnect time control unit connector and NATS IMMU connector.
SEL478X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
EL-524
2 CHECK NATS RELEASE SIGNAL

1. Connect time control unit connector and NATS IMMU connector. GI
2. Connect battery cable (−) terminal.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL479X
OK or NG FE
NG © Check NATS system. CL

MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL433X
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-508. ST
OK or NG
RS
NG © GO TO 2.
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-525

Check continuity between key switch terminals 1 and 2.
SEL492X
OK or NG
IGNITION SWITCH “ON” CIRCUIT CHECK NJEL0477S11

SEL429X
OK or NG
OK © Ignition switch “ON” circuit is OK.
EL-526
REMOTE CONTROLLER SIGNAL CHECK NJEL0477S12
1 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR BY MULTI-REMOTE CONTROLLER GI

1. Withdraw key from ignition key cylinder.
2. Check voltage between time control unit terminal 40 or 44 and ground.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL474XA
OK or NG FE
OK © System is OK.
NG © Replace time control unit. (Before replacing the unit, make sure the remote controller ID CL
registration for time control unit and the remote controller battery once again.)
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-527
MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM

SEL924W

INPUTS NJEL0194S01
I through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
When the key switch is ON (ignition key is inserted in key cylinder), power is supplied
When the door switch driver side is ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied
EL-528
I through door switch driver side terminal 2
I through body grounds B9, B21 and B308. GI
When the any door switches are ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 28 MA
I through each door switch terminal 1
I from each door switch case grounds.
When lock/unlock switch is LOCK, ground is supplied EM
I through door lock/unlock switch terminals 14 (with power window) or 2 (without power window), and 3 LC
When lock/unlock switch is UNLOCK, ground is supplied
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 35 EC
I through door lock/unlock switch terminals 7 (with power window) or 1 (without power window), and 3
I through body grounds M28 and M67. FE
When front door unlock sensor is UNLOCKED, ground is supplied
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 36,
I through door lock actuator (unlock sensor) terminals 2, and 4
CL
Remote controller signal is inputted to smart entrance control unit (The antenna of the system is combined MT
with smart entrance control unit).
The multi-remote control system controls operation of the
I power door lock AT
I hazard reminder
I interior room lamp AX
I panic alarm
I trunk lid opener
SU
OPERATED PROCEDURE NJEL0194S02
Power Door Lock Operation NJEL0194S0201
When the following input signals are both supplied: BR
I key switch OFF (when ignition key is not inserted in key cylinder)
I door switch CLOSED (when all the doors are closed); ST
Smart entrance control unit receives a LOCK/UNLOCK signal from remote controller. Smart entrance control
unit locks/unlocks all doors with input of LOCK/UNLOCK signal from remote controller.
Hazard Reminder RS
NJEL0194S0202
I to multi-remote control relay terminals 1, 3 and 6 BT
When smart entrance control unit receives LOCK or UNLOCK signal from remote controller with all doors
closed and key switch OFF (when ignition key is not inserted in key cylinder), ground is supplied HA
I to multi-remote control relay terminal 2
I through smart entrance control unit terminal 7. SC
Multi-remote control relay is now energized, and hazard warning lamp flashes as a reminder.
The hazard reminder has C mode and S mode.
Operating function of hazard reminder
C mode S mode
IDX
Hazard warning lamp flash Hazard warning lamp flash
Lock Twice Twice
Unlock Once —
EL-529
How to change hazard reminder mode
Hazard reminder mode can be changed only using “WORK SUPPORT” mode in “MULTI REMOTE ENT” with
CONSULT-II.
Interior Room Lamp Operation NJEL0194S0203
When the following input signals are all supplied:
I door switch CLOSED (when all the doors are closed);
I driver’s door LOCKED;
I key switch OFF (when ignition key is not inserted in key cylinder).
multi-remote control system turns on interior room lamp (for 30 seconds) with input of UNLOCK signal from
remote controller.
For detailed description, refer to “INTERIOR, ROOM LAMP” (EL-135).
Panic Alarm Operation NJEL0194S0204
When key switch is OFF (when ignition key is not inserted in key cylinder), multi-remote control system turns
on and off horn intermittently with input of PANIC ALARM signal from remote controller.
The alarm automatically turns off after 25 seconds or when smart entrance control unit receives any signal
from multi-remote controller.
For detailed description, refer to “THEFT WARNING SYSTEM” (EL-578).
Trunk Lid Opener Operation NJEL0194S0205
I to trunk lid opener actuator terminal 3.
When a TRUNK OPEN signal is sent with key OFF (ignition key removed from key cylinder) from remote
controller, ground is supplied
I through smart entrance control unit terminal 12
I to trunk lid opener actuator terminal 1
Then power and ground are supplied, trunk lid opener actuator opens trunk lid.
EL-530
Schematic/Except for Europe
Schematic/Except for Europe NJEL0171
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL489B
EL-531
Wiring Diagram — MULTI —/Except for Europe
Wiring Diagram — MULTI —/Except for Europe

NJEL0114
FIG. 1 NJEL0114S01
HEL490B
EL-532
Wiring Diagram — MULTI —/Except for Europe (Cont’d)
FIG. 2 NJEL0114S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL499B
EL-533
Wiring Diagram — MULTI —/Except for Europe (Cont’d)
FIG. 3 NJEL0114S05
HEL938A
EL-534
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure/Except for Europe
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure/Except for

Europe
“MULTI REMOTE ENT”
NJEL0241
GI
NJEL0241S01
EM
SEF094YA LC
EC
FE
CL
PBR455D
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL845W
6. Touch “MULTI REMOTE ENT”.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL846W

“DATA MONITOR”, “ACTIVE TEST” and “WORK SUPPORT”
are available.
IDX
SEL274W
EL-535
CONSULT-II Application Items/Except for Europe
CONSULT-II Application Items/Except for

Europe NJEL0242
“MULTI REMOTE ENT” NJEL0242S01
ACC ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ACC position.
DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch (Driver’s door).
LOCK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from lock/unlock switch.
UNLK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from lock/unlock switch.
TRUNK BTN/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk open signal from remote controller.
PANIC BTN Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of panic signal from remote controller.
INT/IGN ILLUM This test is able to check interior room lamp operation. The interior room lamp is turned on
HAZARD This test is able to check hazard reminder operation. The hazard lamp turns on when “ON” on
CONSULT-II screen is touched.
ALARM This test is able to check panic alarm operation. The alarm activate for 0.5 seconds after “ON”
on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
TRUNK OUTPUT This test is able to check trunk lid opener actuator operation. The trunk is unlocked when “ON”
on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
Work Support NJEL0242S0103
REMO CONT ID CONFIR It can be checked whether remote controller ID code is registered or not in this mode.
REMO CONT ID REGIST Remote controller ID code can be registered.
REMO CONT ID ERASUE Remote controller ID code can be erased.
HZRD REM SET Hazard reminder mode can be changed in this mode. The reminder mode will be changed when
“MODE SET” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.

NOTE:
I Always check remote controller battery before replacing
remote controller.
I Multi-remote control system do not activate with the ignition
key inserted in the ignition key cylinder.
EL-536
Trouble Diagnoses/Except for Europe (Cont’d)
Reference
Symptom Diagnoses/service procedure page
(EL- ) GI
All function of multi-remote control system do not 1. Remote controller battery and function check 538
operate. MA
2. Power supply and ground circuit for smart entrance control 539
unit check
3. Key switch (insert) check 542 EM

4. Replace remote controller. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure. 550
NOTE: If the result of remote controller function check with
CONSULT-II is OK, remote controller is not malfunctioning. LC
The new ID of remote controller cannot be 1. Remote controller battery and function check 538
entered.
2. Key switch (insert) check 542
EC
3. Door switch check 541
FE
4. Door lock/unlock switch check 543
5. Power supply and ground circuit for smart entrance control 539
unit check CL
CONSULT-II is OK, remote controller is not malfunctioning.
MT
Door lock or unlock does not function. 1. Remote controller battery and function check 538
(If the power door lock system does not operate AT
manually, check power door lock system. Refer to 2. Key switch (insert) check 542
EL-435.) 3. Door switch check 541
AX
CONSULT-II is OK, remote controller is not malfunctioning. SU
Hazard reminder does not activate properly when 1. Hazard reminder check 547
pressing lock or unlock button of remote controller.
BR
Interior room lamp operation do not activate prop- 1. Interior room lamp operation check 549
erly.
ST
3. Door switch check 541
4. Door unlock sensor check 545

RS
Panic alarm (horn) does not activate when panic 1. Remote controller battery and function check 538
alarm button is continuously pressed.
2. Theft warning operation check. Refer to “PRELIMINARY 587 BT
CHECK” in “THEFT WARNING SYSTEM”.

HA
SC
Trunk lid does not open when trunk opener button 1. Remote controller battery and function check 538
is continuously pressed.
2. Trunk lid opener actuator check 546
4. Replace remote controller. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure. 550 IDX

EL-537
REMOTE CONTROLLER BATTERY AND FUNCTION
CHECK =NJEL0195S02
1 CHECK REMOTE CONTROLLER BATTERY

Remove battery (refer to EL-554) and measure voltage across battery positive and negative terminals, (+) and (−).
Voltage [V]:
2.5 - 3.0
NOTE:
Remote controller does not function if battery is not set correctly.
SEL237W
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace battery.
2 CHECK REMOTE CONTROLLER FUNCTION

With CONSULT-II
Check remote controller function (“LK BUTTON/SIG”, “UN BUTTON/SIG”, “TRUNK BTN/SIG” and “PANIC BTN”) in “DATA
MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL819W
OK or NG
OK © Remote controller is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to “SYMPTOM CHART”,
EL-536.
NG © Replace remote controller. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure, EL-550.
EL-538
1 CHECK MAIN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT GI
1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector.
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 10 or 11 and ground.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL226WB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2. CL
I 30A fusible link (letter E, located in fusible link and fuse box)
I 10A fuse (No. 37, located in fusible link and fuse box) MT
I M4 circuit breaker
AT
2 CHECK IGNITION SWITCH “ACC” CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector. AX
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 21 and ground while ignition switch is
“ACC”.
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEL227WA
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-532. BT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3. HA
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse SC
IDX
EL-539
3 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT

Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 16 and ground.
SEL228WA
OK or NG
OK © Power supply and ground circuits are OK.
NG © Check ground harness.
EL-540
DOOR SWITCH CHECK =NJEL0195S04
1 CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL GI

With CONSULT-II
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL323W
Without CONSULT-II
FE
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminals 28 and 29 and ground.
CL
MT
AT
AX
SEL070X
SU
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.
BR
2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH ST

2. Check continuity between door switch terminals. RS
BT
HA
SC
SEL821WA
OK or NG
I Door switch ground circuit or door switch ground condition IDX
EL-541
KEY SWITCH (INSERT) CHECK =NJEL0195S05

With CONSULT-II
Check key switch input signal (“KEY ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL315W
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between control unit terminal 32 and ground.
SEL193WA
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 2.

Check continuity between key switch terminals 1 and 2.
SEL906Y
OK or NG
EL-542

With CONSULT-II
Check door lock/unlock switch input signal (“LOCK SW DR/AS”/“UNLK SW DR/AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II. MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL341W FE
Without CONSULT-II
2. Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 23 or 35 and ground. CL
MT
AT
AX
SEL195WA SU
OK or NG BR
NG © GO TO 2.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-543

2. Check continuity between door lock/unlock switch terminals.
SEL923Y
OK or NG
I Harness for open or short between door lock/unlock switch and smart entrance control
unit connector
EL-544
DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR CHECK =NJEL0195S07
1 CHECK DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL GI

With CONSULT-II
1. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode in “INT LAMP” with CONSULT-II.
2. Check door unlock sensor input signal (“LOCK SIG DR”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode. MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL344WB FE
Without CONSULT-II
CL
MT
AT
AX
SEL847W
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-533. SU
OK or NG
OK © Door unlock sensor is OK. BR
NG © GO TO 2.
ST
1. Disconnect door unlock sensor harness connector. RS
2. Check continuity between lock actuator driver side (door unlock sensor) terminals.
BT
HA
SC
SEL224WB
OK or NG
OK © Check the following. IDX
EL-545
TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUATOR CHECK =NJEL0195S12
1 CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER

Check trunk lid opener operation with trunk lid opener switch.
NOTE: First check trunk lid opener cancel lever position.
Does trunk lid open?
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Check trunk lid opener actuator and the circuit.
2 CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUATOR OPERATION

With CONSULT-II
1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “MULTI REMOTE ENT” with CONSULT-II.
2. Select “TRUNK OUTPUT” and touch “ON”.
SEL345W
NOTE: If CONSULT-II is not available, skip this procedure and go to the next step.
OK or NG
OK © Trunk lid opener actuator circuit is OK.
NG © Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and trunk lid
opener actuator.
3 CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUATOR CIRCUIT

Without CONSULT-II
2. Apply ground to smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 12.
SEL923W
Does trunk lid open?
Yes © Replace smart entrance control unit.
No © Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and trunk lid
opener actuator.
EL-546
HAZARD REMINDER CHECK =NJEL0195S08
1 CHECK HAZARD INDICATOR GI

Check if hazard indicator flashes with hazard switch.
Does hazard indicator operate?
MA
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Check “hazard indicator” circuit.
EM
2 CHECK HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION WITH CONSULT-II
With CONSULT-II
LC
2. Select “HAZARD” and touch “ON”.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SEL347W
NOTE: If CONSULT-II is not available, skip this procedure and go to the next step.
AT
OK or NG
OK © Hazard reminder operation is OK. AX
NG © GO TO 4.
SU
3 CHECK HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION WITHOUT CONSULT-II
Without CONSULT-II BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL225WB
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-532. SC
OK or NG
OK © Replace smart entrance control unit.
NG © GO TO 4.
IDX
EL-547
4 CHECK MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL RELAY

Check multi-remote control relay.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Replace multi-remote control relay.
5 CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL RELAY

1. Disconnect multi-remote control relay harness connector.
2. Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground.
SEL235WB
Does battery voltage exist?

Yes © GO TO 6.
No © Check the following.
I Harness for open or short between multi-remote control relay and fuse
6 CHECK MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL RELAY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect multi-remote control relay harness connector.
2. Check voltage between terminals 3 and 5.
3. Check voltage between terminals 6 and 7.
SEL236WB
OK or NG
OK © Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and multi-remote
control relay.
I Harness for open or short between multi-remote control relay and turn signal lamps
EL-548
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP OPERATION CHECK =NJEL0195S10
1 CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP GI

Check if the interior room lamp switch is in the “ON” position and the lamp illuminates.
Does interior room lamp illuminate?
MA
Yes © GO TO 2.
I Power supply for interior room lamp EM
I Harness for open or short between interior room lamp and fuse
I Interior room lamp
LC
2 CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
EC
2. Select “INT/IGN ILLUM” and touch “ON”.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEL349WA
AX
Without CONSULT-II
Push unlock button of remote controller with all doors closed and drivers door locked, and check voltage between smart SU
entrance control unit harness connector terminal 8 and ground.
BR
ST
RS
SEL231WB
BT
OK or NG HA
OK © System is OK.
NG © Check harness open or short between smart entrance control unit and interior room SC
lamp.
IDX
EL-549
ID Code Entry Procedure/Except for Europe
ID Code Entry Procedure/Except for Europe =NJEL0117

REMOTE CONTROLLER ID SET UP WITH CONSULT-II
NJEL0117S01
NOTE:
If a remote controller is lost, the ID code of the lost remote
controller must be erased to prevent unauthorized use. When
the ID code of a lost remote controller is not known, all con-
troller ID codes should be erased. After all ID codes are
erased, the ID codes of all remaining and/or new remote con-
trollers must be re-registered.

2. Connect CONSULT-II to the data link connector.
SEF094YA

PBR455D
SEL845W
6. Touch “MULTI REMOTE ENT”.
SEL846W
EL-550
ID Code Entry Procedure/Except for Europe (Cont’d)
7. Touch “WORK SUPPORT”.
GI
MA
EM
SEL274W LC
8. The items are shown on the figure at left can be set up.
I “REMO CONT ID CONFIR”
Use this mode to confirm if a remote controller ID code is reg-
EC
istered or not.
I “REMO CONT ID REGIST” FE
Use this mode to register a remote controller ID code.
NOTE:
Register the ID code when remote controller or smart entrance CL
control unit is replaced, or when additional remote controller
is required.
SEL277W I “REMO CONT ID ERASUR” MT
Use this mode to erase a remote controller ID code.
I “HZRD REM SET”
Use this mode to activate or deactivate the hazard reminder.
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-551
REMOTE CONTROLLER ID SET UP WITHOUT
CONSULT-II NJEL0117S02
SEL332WC
EL-552
NOTE:
I If a remote controller is lost, the ID code of the lost remote
controller must be erased to prevent unauthorized use. A spe- GI
cific ID code can be erased with CONSULT-II. However, when
the ID code of a lost remote controller is not known, all con-
troller ID codes should be erased. After all ID codes are MA
erased, the ID codes of all remaining and/or new remote con-
trollers must be re-registered.
To erase all ID codes in memory, register one ID code (remote EM
controller) four times. After all ID codes are erased, the ID
codes of all remaining and/or new remote controllers must be
re-registered. LC
I When registering an additional remote controller, the existing
ID codes in memory may or may not be erased. If four ID
codes are stored in memory, when an additional code is EC
registered, only the oldest code is erased. If less than four ID
codes are stored in memory, when an additional ID code is
registered, the new ID code is added and no ID codes are FE
erased.
I If you need to activate more than two additional new remote CL
controllers, repeat the procedure “Additional ID code entry” for
each new remote controller.
I Entry of maximum four ID codes is allowed. When more than MT
four ID codes are entered, the oldest ID code will be erased.
I Even if same ID code that is already in the memory is input,
the same ID code can be entered. The code is counted as an AT
additional code.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-553
Remote Controller Battery Replacement/Except for Europe
Remote Controller Battery Replacement/Except

for Europe NJEL0118
SEL366W
EL-554

FUNCTION
Multi-remote control system has the following function.
NJEL0399S01
GI
I Door lock (and set super lock)
I Door unlock (and release super lock) MA
I Hazard reminder
LOCK OPERATION NJEL0399S02 EM
To lock door by multi-remote controller, the ignition switch must be at OFF.
When the LOCK signal is input to multi-remote control unit (the antenna of the system is combined with multi-
remote control unit), ground is supplied LC
I through multi-remote control unit terminal 5
EC
Then time control unit operates to lock doors and set super lock (models with super lock).
UNLOCK OPERATION
When the UNLOCK signal is input to multi-remote control unit (the antenna of the system is combined with
NJEL0399S03
FE
multi-remote control unit), ground is supplied
I through multi-remote control unit terminal 6 CL
Time control unit operates to unlock driver’s door and release super lock (models with super lock).
Then, if an unlock signal is sent from the remote controller again within 5 seconds, all other doors will be MT
unlocked.
HAZARD REMINDER NJEL0399S04
AT
When the doors are locked or unlocked by multi-remote controller (signal from driver side unlock sensor),
supply power to hazard warning lamp flashes as follows
I Lock operation: Flash once AX
MULTI-REMOTE CONTROLLER ID CODE ENTRY SU
NJEL0399S05
A maximum of four remote controllers can be entered.
To enter ID code entry, the following signals must be input to the multi-remote control unit.
BR
I Ignition switch (ON)
I Signal from remote controller
For detailed procedure, refer to “ID Code Entry Procedure” in EL-564. ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-555
Wiring Diagram — MULTI —/Sedan for Europe
Wiring Diagram — MULTI —/Sedan for Europe

NJEL0400
FIG. 1 NJEL0400S01
HEL419B
EL-556
Wiring Diagram — MULTI —/Sedan for Europe (Cont’d)
FIG. 2 NJEL0400S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL420B
EL-557
Trouble Diagnoses/Sedan For Europe
Trouble Diagnoses/Sedan For Europe NJEL0478

NOTE:
Always check remote controller battery before replacing remote
controller.
Reference
(EL- )
All function of multi-remote control system do not 1. Remote controller battery check 559
operate.
2. Power supply and ground circuit for control unit check 560
The new ID of remote controller cannot be 1. Remote controller battery check 559
entered.
2. Power supply and ground circuit for control unit check 560
Door lock or unlock does not function. 1. Remote controller battery and function check 559
(If the power door lock system does not operate
manually, check power door lock system.) 2. Replace remote controller. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure. 564
Hazard reminder does not activate properly when 1. Remote controller battery and function check 559
2. Hazard reminder check 563
EL-558
Trouble Diagnoses/Sedan For Europe (Cont’d)
REMOTE CONTROLLER BATTERY CHECK =NJEL0478S02
1 CHECK REMOTE CONTROLLER BATTERY GI

Remove battery and measure voltage across battery positive and negative terminals, (+) and (−).
Voltage [V]:
2.5 - 3.0 MA
NOTE:
EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL237W
OK or NG CL
OK © Check remote controller battery terminals for corrosion or damage.
NG © Replace battery. MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-559
1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR TIME CONTROL UNIT
2. Check voltage between time control unit harness connector terminal 1 or 10 and ground.
SEL006X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
I 30A fusible link (letter E, located in fusible link and fuse box)
I M4 circuit breaker
2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

1. Disconnect multi-remote control unit harness connector.
2. Check voltage between multi-remote control unit harness connector terminal 2 and ground.
SEL482XB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
I Harness for open or short between multi-remote control unit and fuse
EL-560
3 CHECK IGNITION SWITCH “ON” CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect multi-remote control unit harness connector. GI
2. Check voltage between multi-remote control unit terminal 4 and ground while ignition switch is “ON”.
MA
EM
LC
SEL483X
EC
OK or NG FE
OK © GO TO 4.
I Harness for open or short between multi-remote control unit and fuse.
MT
4 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR TIME CONTROL UNIT
Check continuity between time control unit harness connector terminal 16 and ground. AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL992W
ST
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-561
5 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

Check continuity between multi-remote control unit terminal 1 and ground.
SEL484XB
OK or NG
EL-562
HAZARD REMINDER CHECK =NJEL0478S04
1 CHECK HAZARD WARNING LAMP GI

Check if hazard warning lamp flashes with hazard switch.
Does hazard warning lamp operate?
MA
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Check hazard warning lamp circuit.
EM
2 CHECK HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION
Check the following at when push the multi-remote control switch.
LC
Check voltage between terminal 3 and ground.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SEL502XA
AT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Replace multi-remote control unit.
AX
3 CHECK HAZARD REMINDER CIRCUIT SU

1. Disconnect multi-remote control unit harness connector.
2. Check continuity between multi-remote control unit and hazard switch. BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL503XA
HA
OK or NG
OK © System is OK.
SC
IDX
EL-563
ID Code Entry Procedure/Sedan for Europe
ID Code Entry Procedure/Sedan for Europe =NJEL0402
SEL497X
EL-564
Remote Controller Battery Replacement/Sedan for Europe
Remote Controller Battery Replacement/Sedan

for Europe NJEL0479
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SEL241X
SU
BR
System Description/Hatchbck NJEL0480 ST

FUNCTION NJEL0480S01
Multi-remote control system has the following function.
I Door lock (and set super lock) RS
I Door unlock (and release super lock)
I Hazard reminder BT
LOCK OPERATION NJEL0480S02
To lock door by multi-remote controller, the key switch must be at OFF.
When the LOCK signal is input to time control unit (the antenna of the system is combined with time control
HA
unit)
Then time control unit controls to lock doors and set super lock (models with super lock).
SC
UNLOCK OPERATION NJEL0480S03
When the UNLOCK signal is input to time control unit (the antenna of the system is combined with time con-
trol unit)
Time control unit controls to unlock driver’s door and release super lock (models with super lock).
Then, if an unlock signal is sent from the remote controller again within 5 seconds, all other doors will be
unlocked. IDX
HAZARD REMINDER NJEL0480S04
When the doors are locked or unlocked by multi-remote controller, supply power to turn lamps hazard reminder
flashes as follows
EL-565
System Description/Hatchbck (Cont’d)
I Lock operation: Flash once
MULTI-REMOTE CONTROLLER ID CODE ENTRY NJEL0480S05
A maximum of four remote controllers can be entered.
To enter ID code entry, the following signals must be input to the time control unit.
I Ignition switch (ON)
I Signal from remote controller
For detailed procedure, refer to “ID Code Entry Procedure” in EL-573.
EL-566
Wiring Diagram — MULTI —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — MULTI —/Hatchback NJEL0481

FIG. 1 NJEL0481S01
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL128M
EL-567
Wiring Diagram — MULTI —/Hatchback (Cont’d)
FIG. 2 NJEL0481S02
MEL129M
EL-568

SYMPTOM CHART
NOTE:
NJEL0482S01
GI
Always check remote controller battery before replacing remote
controller. MA
Reference
(EL- ) EM
No doors can be locked or unlocked by remote 1. Remote controller battery check 570
control operation.
(Make sure that power door lock operates prop- 2. Power supply and ground circuit for time control unit check 571 LC
erly. If NG, check power door lock.) 3. Replace remote controller. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure. 573
The new ID of remote controller cannot be 1. Remote controller battery check 570
EC
entered.
2. Power supply and ground circuit for time control unit check 571
3. Ignition “ON” power supply circuit for time control unit 572
FE
CL
Hazard reminder does not activate properly when 1. Remote controller battery 570
2. Hazard reminder check 572
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-569
REMOTE CONTROLLER BATTERY AND FUNCTION
CHECK =NJEL0482S02
1 CHECK REMOTE CONTROLLER BATTERY

Remove battery (refer to EL-565) and measure voltage across battery positive and negative terminals, (+) and (−).
Voltage [V]:
2.5 - 3.0
NOTE:
SEL237W
OK or NG
OK © Check remote controller battery terminals for corrosion or damage.
NG © Replace battery.
EL-570
1 CHECK MAIN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR TIME CONTROL UNIT GI
2. Check voltage between time control unit harness connector terminal 9 and ground.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL487X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2. CL
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and fuse MT
2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR TIME CONTROL UNIT AT

Check continuity between time control unit harness connector terminal 16 and ground.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL448X
OK or NG
RS
NG © Check ground harness. BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-571
IGNITION “ON” POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR TIME
CONTROL UNIT =NJEL0482S17
1 CHECK IGNITION “ON” POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR TIME CONTROL UNIT
1. Disconnected time control unit harness connector.
SEL429X
OK or NG
OK © Ignition “ON” power supply circuit is OK.
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and fuse.
HAZARD REMINDER CHECK NJEL0482S18
1 CHECK HAZARD WARNING LAMP

Check if hazard warning lamp flashes with hazard switch.
Does hazard warning lamp operate?
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Check hazard warning lamp circuit.
2 CHECK HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION

Check the following at when push the multi-remote control switch.
SEL499XA
OK or NG
OK © System is OK.
NG © Replace time control unit. (Before replacing the unit, make sure the remote controller ID
registration for time control unit and the remote controller battery once again.)
EL-572
ID Code Entry Procedure/Hatchback
ID Code Entry Procedure/Hatchback =NJEL0483
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
SEL497X
EL-573
Remote Controller Battery Replacement/Hatchback
Remote Controller Battery

Replacement/Hatchback NJEL0484
Refer to “Remote Controller Battery Replacement/Sedan for
Europe”, EL-565.
EL-574
THEFT WARNING SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location

Location NJEL0119
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
SEL925W
EL-575
System Description

DESCRIPTION NJEL0196S01
1. Operation Flow NJEL0196S0101
SEL753UB
2. Setting The Theft Warning System NJEL0196S0102

Initial condition
1) Close all doors.
2) Close hood and glass hatch.
Disarmed phase
The theft warning system is in the disarmed phase when any door(s), hood or glass hatch is opened. The
security indicator lamp blinks every second.
Pre-armed phase and armed phase
The theft warning system turns into the “pre-armed” phase when hood, glass hatch and all doors are closed
and the doors are locked by key or multi-remote controller. (The security indicator lamp illuminates.)
After about 30 seconds, the system automatically shifts into the “armed” phase (the system is set). (The
security indicator lamp blinks every 2.6 seconds.)
3. Canceling The Set Theft Warning System NJEL0196S0103
When the following 1) or 2) operation is performed, the armed phase is canceled.
1) Unlock the doors with the key or multi-remote controller.
2) Open the trunk lid with the key or multi-remote controller.
4. Activating The Alarm Operation of The Theft Warning System NJEL0196S0104
Make sure the system is in the armed phase. (The security indicator lamp blinks every 2.6 seconds.)
When the following operation 1) or 2) is performed, the system sounds the horns and flashes the hazard
warning lamp for about 25 seconds.
1) Engine hood, trunk lid or any door is opened before smart entrance control unit receives UNLOCK signal
from key cylinder switch or multi-remote controller.
2) Disconnecting and connecting the battery connector before canceling armed phase.
I to security indicator lamp terminals 2 and 1
EL-576
I through 10A fuse [No. 24, located in the fuse block (J/B)] GI
Ground is supplied MA
EM
INITIAL CONDITION TO ACTIVATE THE SYSTEM NJEL0196S03
The operation of the theft warning system is controlled by the doors, hood and trunk lid.
To activate the theft warning system, the smart entrance control unit must receive signals indicating the doors, LC
hood and trunk lid are closed.
When a door is open, smart entrance control unit terminal 28 receives a ground signal from each door switch.
When the hood is open, smart entrance control unit terminal 27 receives a ground signal EC
I from terminal 1 of the hood switch, and terminal 2
I through body grounds E30 and E73.
FE
When the trunk lid is open, smart entrance control unit terminal 38 receives a ground signal
I from terminal 1 of the trunk room lamp switch, and terminal 2
I through body grounds B9, B21 and B308. CL
When smart entrance control unit receives LOCK signal from key cylinder switch or multi-remote controller and
none of the described conditions exist, the theft warning system will automatically shift to armed mode.
MT
THEFT WARNING SYSTEM ACTIVATION NJEL0196S04
With all doors (including hood and trunk lid) close if the key is used to lock doors, terminal 41 receives a ground
signal AT
I from terminal 1 of the door key cylinder switch driver side, and terminal 2
I through body grounds M28 and M67. AX
If this signal, or lock signal from remote controller is received by the smart entrance control unit, the theft
warning system will activate automatically.
NOTE: SU
Theft warning system can be set even though all doors are not locked.
Once the theft warning system has been activated, smart entrance control unit terminal 31 supplies ground to BR
terminal 1 of the security indicator lamp.
The security indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately 30 seconds and then blinks every 2.6 seconds.
Now the theft warning system is in armed phase. ST
THEFT WARNING SYSTEM ALARM OPERATION NJEL0196S05
The theft warning system is triggered by
RS
I opening a door
I opening the hood or the trunk lid
I detection of battery disconnect and connect. BT
Once the theft warning system is in armed phase, if the smart entrance control unit receives a ground signal
at terminal 28 (door switch), 38 (trunk room lamp switch) or 27 (hood switch), the theft warning system will be
triggered. The hazard warning lamp flashes and the horn sounds intermittently, and the starting system is HA
interrupted.
SC
I to multi-remote control relay terminals 1, 3 and 6,
I through 10A fuse (No. 35, located in fusible link and fuse box)
I to theft warning horn relay terminals 1 and 6,
I through 10A fuse (No. 33, located in fusible link and fuse box)
IDX
I to horn relay terminal 2.
When the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
I to theft warning relay terminal 1.
EL-577
When the theft warning system is triggered, ground is supplied intermittently
I from smart entrance control unit terminal 7
I to multi-remote control relay terminal 2,
I to theft warning horn relay terminal 2, and
I to theft warning relay terminal 2.
The hazard warning lamps flash and the horn sounds intermittently, and the starting system is interrupted.
The alarm automatically turns off after 25 seconds but will reactivate if the vehicle is tampered with again.
THEFT WARNING SYSTEM DEACTIVATION NJEL0196S06
To deactivate the theft warning system, a door or trunk lid must be unlocked with the key or remote control-
ler.
When the key is used to unlock the door, smart entrance control unit terminal 30 receives a ground signal
I from terminal 3 of the door key cylinder switch driver side.
When the key is used to open the trunk lid, smart entrance control unit terminal 42 receives a ground signal
from terminal 1 of the trunk key cylinder switch.
When the smart entrance control unit receives either one of these signals or unlock signal from remote
controller, the theft warning system is deactivated. (Disarmed phase)
PANIC ALARM OPERATION NJEL0196S07
Multi-remote control system may or may not operate theft warning system (horn) as required.
When the multi-remote control system (panic alarm) is triggered, ground is supplied intermittently
I to theft warning horn relay terminal 2.
The horn sounds intermittently.
The alarm automatically turns off after 25 seconds or when smart entrance control unit receives any signal
from multi-remote controller.
EL-578
Schematic
Schematic NJEL0121
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL491B
EL-579
Wiring Diagram — THEFT —
Wiring Diagram — THEFT — NJEL0122

FIG. 1 NJEL0122S01
HEL492B
EL-580
Wiring Diagram — THEFT — (Cont’d)
FIG. 2 NJEL0122S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL943A
EL-581
FIG. 3 NJEL0122S03
HEL944A
EL-582
FIG. 4 NJEL0122S04
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL493B
EL-583
FIG. 5 NJEL0122S07
HEL946A
EL-584
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure =NJEL0244

“THEFT WAR ALM”
NJEL0244S01
GI
MA
EM
SEF094YA LC
EC
FE
CL
PBR455D
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL845W
6. Touch “THEFT WAR ALM”.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL846W

“DATA MONITOR”, “ACTIVE TEST” and “WORK SUPPORT”
are available.
IDX
SEL274W
EL-585
CONSULT-II Application Item
CONSULT-II Application Item NJEL0245

“THEFT WAR ALM” NJEL0245S01
ACC ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ACC position.
KEY CYL LK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from key cylinder switch.
KEY CYL UN SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from key cylinder switch.
TRUNK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk room lamp switch.
TRUNK KEY SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk key cylinder switch.
HOOD SWITCH Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of hood switch.
TRUNK BTN/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk open signal from remote controller.
This test is able to check security indicator lamp operation. The lamp will be turned on when
THEFT IND
“ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
This test is able to check theft waning alarm operation. The alarm will be activated for 0.5
THEFT WAR ALM
seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
This test is able to check starter interrupt system operation. The starting system will be deacti-
STARTER CUT ALM
vated when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
Work Support NJEL0245S0103
The switch which triggered theft warning alarm is recorded. This mode is able to confirm and
THEFT ALM TRG erase the record of theft waning alarm. The trigger data can be erased by touching “CLEAR”
on CONSULT-II screen.
EL-586
Trouble Diagnoses
Trouble Diagnoses =NJEL0123

The system operation is canceled by turning ignition switch to “ACC” at any step between START and ARMED
GI
in the following flow chart.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
MEL447HD SC
After performing preliminary check, go to symptom chart on next page.
IDX
EL-587
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
REFERENCE PAGE (EL- ) 587 589 590 596 598 600 601 603 605 536
THEFT WARNING HAZARD WARNING LAMP ALARM CHECK

DOOR, HOOD AND TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH CHECK
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
Check “MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL” system.

TRUNK KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK
STARTER INTERRUPT SYSTEM CHECK

DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK
SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP CHECK
THEFT WARNING HORN CHECK

PRELIMINARY CHECK
SYMPTOM
Theft warning indicator does

1 not turn “ON” and is not X X X X
blinking.
system cannot
Theft warning
All items X X X
be set by ....
2 Door outside key X X
Multi-remote control X X
system does not
*1 Theft warning
alarm when ...
One of the door is

3 X X
opened
All function X X
alarm does not
Horn alarm X X
Theft warning
4 Hazard warning
activate.
X X
lamp alarm
Starter interrupt X X
system cannot be
Door outside key X X

canceled by ....
Theft warning
5 Trunk lid key X X
Multi-remote control X X
X : Applicable
*1: Make sure the system is in the armed phase.
Before starting trouble diagnoses above, perform preliminary check, EL-587.
Symptom numbers in the symptom chart correspond with those of preliminary check.
EL-588
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SEL926W
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL234WA
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-589
DOOR, HOOD AND TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH CHECK =NJEL0123S04
Door Switch Check NJEL0123S0401
1 PRELIMINARY CHECK
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and remove key from ignition key cylinder.
2. Close all doors, hood and trunk lid.
“SECURITY” indicator lamp should turn off.
3. Open any door.
“SECURITY” indicator lamp should blink every second.
OK or NG
OK © Door switch is OK, and go to hood switch check.
NG © GO TO 2.

With CONSULT-II
SEL323W
Without CONSULT-II
SEL980W
OK or NG
OK © Door switch is OK, and go to hood switch check.
NG © GO TO 3.
EL-590
3 CHECK DOOR SWITCH

1. Disconnect door switch connector. GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL088XA
EC
OK or NG
I Door switch ground circuit (Front, back door) or door switch ground condition
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-591
Hood Switch Check =NJEL0123S0402
1 PRELIMINARY CHECK
3. Open hood.
OK or NG
OK © Hood switch is OK, and go to trunk room lamp switch check.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK HOOD SWITCH FITTING CONDITION
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Adjust installation of hood switch or hood.
3 CHECK HOOD SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
Check hood switch input signal (“HOOD SWITCH”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL354W
Without CONSULT-II
SEL239WB
OK or NG
OK © Hood switch is OK, and go to trunk room lamp switch check.
NG © GO TO 4.
EL-592
4 CHECK HOOD SWITCH

1. Disconnect hood switch connector. GI
2. Check continuity between hood switch terminals 1 and 2.
MA
EM
LC
SEL240WA
EC
OK or NG
I Hood switch ground circuit
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and hood switch
CL
NG © Replace hood switch.
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-593
Trunk Room Lamp Switch Check =NJEL0123S0403
1 PRELIMINARY CHECK
3. Open trunk lid.
OK or NG
OK © Trunk room lamp switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
Check trunk room lamp switch input signal (“TRUNK SW”), in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL355W
Without CONSULT-II
SEL241WA
OK or NG
OK © Trunk room lamp switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 3.
EL-594
3 CHECK TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH

1. Disconnect trunk room lamp switch connector. GI
2. Check continuity between trunk room lamp switch terminals 1 and 2.
MA
EM
LC
SEL242WA
EC
OK or NG
I Trunk room lamp switch ground circuit
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and trunk room lamp
switch CL
NG © Replace trunk room lamp switch.
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-595
SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP CHECK =NJEL0123S05
1 CHECK INDICATOR LAMP OPERATION

With CONSULT-II
1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “THEFT WAR ALM” with CONSULT-II.
2. Select “THEFT IND” and touch “ON”.
SEL356W
Without CONSULT-II
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 31 and ground.
SEL243WA
OK or NG
OK © Security indicator lamp is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Replace security indicator lamp.
EL-596
3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR INDICATOR LAMP

1. Disconnect security indicator lamp connector. GI
2. Check voltage between security indicator lamp terminal 2 and ground.
MA
EM
LC
SEL927W
EC
OK or NG
OK © Check harness for open or short between security indicator lamp and smart entrance FE
control unit.
I Harness for open or short between security indicator lamp and fuse
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-597
DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK =NJEL0123S07
1 CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (LOCK/UNLOCK SIGNAL)

With CONSULT-II
Check door key cylinder switch input signal (“KEY CYL LK-SW”/“KEY CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
SEL342WA
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 30 or 41 and ground.
SEL198WA
OK or NG
OK © Door key cylinder switch driver side is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.
EL-598

1. Disconnect door key cylinder switch connector. GI
2. Check continuity between door key cylinder switch connector terminals.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SEL981W
OK or NG
AT
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door key cylinder AX
switch
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-599
TRUNK KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK =NJEL0123S08
1 CHECK TRUNK KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (UNLOCK SIGNAL)

With CONSULT-II
Check trunk key cylinder switch input signal (“TRUNK KEY SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL358W
Without CONSULT-II
SEL247WA
OK or NG
OK © Trunk key cylinder switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK TRUNK KEY CYLINDER SWITCH

1. Disconnect trunk key cylinder switch connector.
2. Check continuity between trunk key cylinder switch terminals.
SEL248WA
OK or NG
I Trunk key cylinder switch ground circuit
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and trunk key cylinder
switch
NG © Replace trunk key cylinder switch.
EL-600
THEFT WARNING HORN ALARM CHECK =NJEL0123S09
1 CHECK THEFT WARNING HORN ALARM OPERATION GI

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “THEFT WAR ALM” and touch “ON”. MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL359WB FE
Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector. CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
SEL249WC
OK or NG
BR
OK © Horn alarm is OK.
NG © GO TO 2. ST
2 CHECK THEFT WARNING HORN RELAY RS

Check theft warning horn relay.
OK or NG BT
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Replace. HA
SC
IDX
EL-601
3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR THEFT WARNING HORN RELAY

1. Disconnect theft warning horn relay connectors.
SEL829WA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
I 10A fuse (No. 35 located in the fusible link and fuse box)
I Harness for open or short between theft warning horn relay and fuse
4 CHECK THEFT WARNING HORN RELAY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect theft warning horn relay connector.
2. Check voltage between terminals of relay.
Battery voltage should exist.
SEL655WC
OK or NG
OK © Check harness for open or short between theft warning horn relay and smart entrance
control unit.
I Harness for open or short between theft warning horn relay and fuses
EL-602
THEFT WARNING HAZARD WARNING LAMP ALARM CHECK =NJEL0123S14
1 CHECK THEFT WARNING HAZARD WARNING LAMP ALARM OPERATION GI

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “THEFT WAR ALM” and touch “ON”. MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL359WC FE
Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector. CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
SEL982W
OK or NG
BR
OK © Hazard warning lamp alarm is OK.
NG © GO TO 2. ST
2 CHECK MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL RELAY RS

Check multi-remote control relay.
OK or NG BT
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Replace. HA
SC
IDX
EL-603
3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL RELAY

1. Disconnect multi-remote control relay connectors.
SEL829WB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
I 15A fuse [No. 5 located in the fuse block (J/B)]
4 CHECK MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL RELAY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect multi-remote control relay connector.
2. Check voltage between terminals of relay.
Battery voltage should exist.
SEL655WD
OK or NG
OK © Check harness for open or short between multi-remote control relay and smart entrance
control unit.
EL-604
STARTER INTERRUPT SYSTEM CHECK NJEL0123S15
1 CHECK STARTER INTERRUPT SYSTEM OPERATION GI

With CONSULT-II
1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “THEFT WAR ALM” wtih CONSULT-II.
2. Select “START CUT ALM” and touch “ON”. MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL089X FE
OK or NG
OK © Door lock actuator is OK. CL
NG © GO TO 2.
MT
2 CHECK STARTER INTERRUPT SIGNAL
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit terminal 19 and ground.
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL983W ST
OK or NG
OK © Check theft warning relay. RS
I Theft warning relay coil circuit
BT
I Harness for open or short between theft warning relay and fuse
I Harness for open or short between theft warning relay and smart entrance control unit
HA
SC
IDX
EL-605
SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT
Description
OUTLINE NJEL0124S01
The smart entrance control unit totally controls the following body electrical system operations.
I Warning chime
I Rear window defogger and door mirror defogger
I Power door lock
I Multi-remote control system
I Theft warning system
I Interior room lamp
INPUT/OUTPUT NJEL0124S04
System Input Output
Door lock and unlock switch

Door switches
Power door lock Door lock actuator
Door unlock sensor
Door key cylinder switches
Key switch (Insert)

Theft warning horn relay
Ignition switch (ACC)
Interior room lamp
Door switches
Multi-remote control Multi-remote control relay
Door lock actuator
Door unlock sensor
Trunk lid opener actuator
Remote controller signal
Key switch (Insert)

Ignition switch (ON) Warning chime (located in smart entrance
Warning chime
Lighting switch (1st) control unit)
Door switch driver side
Rear window defogger and Ignition switch (ON)

Rear window defogger relay
door mirror defogger Rear window defogger switch
Ignition switch (ACC, ON)

Door switches Multi-remote control relay
Hood switch Theft warning relay
Theft warning
Door key cylinder switches (lock/unlock) Theft warning horn relay
Trunk key cylinder switch (unlock) Security indicator
Trunk room lamp switch
Door switches
Door unlock sensor
Interior room lamp Interior room lamp
Ignition switch (ON)
Key switch (Insert)
EL-606
CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II =NJEL0247
DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS APPLICATION NJEL0247S01
GI
Item (CONSULT-II Diagnosed system DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST WORK SUPPORT
screen terms)
MA
DOOR LOCK Power door lock X X
REAR DEFOGGER Rear window defogger X X

EM
KEY WARN ALM Warning chime X X
LIGHT WARN ALM Warning chime X X

LC
INT LAMP Interior room lamps X
THEFT WAR ALM Theft warning system X X X

EC
MULTI REMOTE ENT Multi-remote control sys-
X X X
tem
FE
X: Applicable
For diagnostic item in each control system, refer to the relevant pages for each system.
DIAGNOSTIC ITEM DESCRIPTION CL

NJEL0247S02
MODE Description
MT
DATA MONITOR Input/output data in the smart entrance control unit can be read.
ACTIVE TEST Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some sys-
tems apart from the smart entrance control unit. AT
WORK SUPPORT for THEFT WAR ALM The recorded trigger signal when theft warning system was acti-
vated can be checked. AX
WORK SUPPORT for MULTI REMOTE ENT ID code of multi-remote controller can be registered and erased.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-607
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE =NJEL0247S03
1. Turn the ignition switch “OFF”.
SEF094YA

PBR455D
SEL845W
6. Perform each diagnostic item according to “DIAGNOSTIC

ITEMS APPLICATION”. Refer to EL-607.
SEL846W
EL-608
NOTE:
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-609
Schematic
Schematic NJEL0125
HEL494B
EL-610
Schematic (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL950A
EL-611
Smart Entrance Control Unit Inspection Table
Smart Entrance Control Unit Inspection Table NJEL0126
Voltage
Terminal Wire
Connections Operated condition (Approximate
No. color
values)
2 G/W Rear window defogger relay OFF , ON (Ignition key is in “ON” position) 0V , 12V
4 SB Theft warning horn relay When panic alarm is operated using remote controller 12V , 0V
7 OR/B Multi-remote control relay When doors are locked using remote controller 12V , 0V
When interior lamp is operated using remote controller.

8 R/Y Interior room lamp 12V , 0V
(Lamp switch in “DOOR” position)
10 R/B Power source (Fuse) — 12V
11 W/L Power source (C/B) — 12V
12 P/B Trunk lid opener switch ON (Open) , OFF (Closed) 0V , 12V
13 L/R Door lock actuator driver side Free 0V
Passenger and rear doors lock Door lock & unlock switch
14 W/R Unlocked 12V
actuator
Free 0V
15 R/B Door lock actuators Door lock & unlock switch
Locked 12V
16 B Ground — —
Starter cut output OFF , ON (Ignition key is in “ON”

19 BR/W Theft warning relay 12V , 0V
position)
21 P Ignition switch (ACC) “ACC” position 12V
23 GY Door lock & unlock switches Neutral , Locks 5V , 0V
27 P/B Hood switch ON (Open) , OFF (Closed) 0V , 5V
28 R/W All door switches OFF (Closed) , ON (Open) 5V , 0V
29 R Driver door switch OFF (Closed) , ON (Open) 5V , 0V
30 W/L Door key cylinder unlock switch OFF (Neutral) , ON (Unlocked) 5V , 0V
31 GY/R Security indicator Goes off , Illuminates 12V , 0V
32 L/W Ignition key switch (Insert) key inserted , key removed from IGN key cylinder 12V , 0V
33 G Ignition switch (ON) Ignition key is in “ON” position 12V
34 R/G Lighting switch 1ST, 2ND positions: ON , OFF 12V , 0V
35 PU Door lock & unlock switches Neutral , Unlocks 5V , 0V
36 Y/G Driver door unlock sensor Driver door: Locked , Unlocked 5V , 0V
38 R/B Trunk room lamp switch ON (Open) , OFF (Closed) 0V , 12V
39 G/B Rear window defogger switch OFF , ON 5V , 0V
41 LG/R Door key cylinder lock switch OFF (Neutral) , ON (Locked) 5V , 0V
42 L/OR Trunk key cylinder switch OFF (Neutral) , ON (Unlock) 5V , 0V
EL-612
TIME CONTROL UNIT
Description/Sedan Except for Europe
Description/Sedan Except for Europe NJEL0308

OUTLINE
The time control unit totally controls the following body electrical system operations.
NJEL0308S01
GI
I Warning chime
I Rear defogger MA
I Power door lock
I Interior lamp
EM
System Input Output LC

Door switches
Power door lock
Door unlock sensor
Door lock actuator EC
Key switch (Insert) FE

Warning chime Warning chime (located in time control unit)
Lighting switch (1st)
CL
Rear window defogger and Ignition switch (ON)
Rear window defogger relay
door mirror defogger Rear window defogger switch
MT
Door switches
Front door unlock sensor
Interior lamp Interior lamp
Key switch (Insert)
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-613
TIME CONTROL UNIT
Schematic/Sedan Except for Europe
Schematic/Sedan Except for Europe NJEL0309
HEL495B
EL-614
TIME CONTROL UNIT
Time Control Unit Inspection Table/Sedan Except for Europe
Time Control Unit Inspection Table/Sedan

GI
Voltage
Terminal Wire
Connections Operated condition (Approximate
No. color
values) MA
When interior room lamp is operated
(Lamp switch in “DOOR” position)
EM
Passenger and rear doors lock Locked 12V
6 R/B Door lock & unlock switch
actuator Unlocked 0V LC
7 R/W All door switches OFF (closed) , ON (open) 5V , 0V
8 G/W Rear window defogger relay OFF , ON (Ignition key is in “ON” position) 0V , 12V EC
9 Y/G Door unlock sensor Locked , Unlocked 5V , 0V
10 L/W Key switch Key inserted , Key removed from IGN key cylinder 12V , 0V FE
11 GY Door lock & unlock switches Neutral , Locks 5V , 0V
Passenger and rear doors lock Locked 0V CL

12 W/R Door lock & unlock switch
actuator Unlocked 12V
13 G/B Rear window defogger switch OFF , ON 5V , 0V MT

14 *1 Power source (C/B) — 12V
15 R/G Lighting switch 1ST, 2ND positions: ON , OFF 12V , 0V

AT
16 B GND — 0V
AX
19 PU Door lock & unlock switches Neutral , Unlocks 5V , 0V

SU
20 R Door switch driver side OFF (closed) , ON (open) 5V , 0V
*1: W/L (with power door lock), R/B (without power door lock)
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-615
TIME CONTROL UNIT
Description/Sedan for Europe
Description/Sedan for Europe =NJEL0403

OUTLINE NJEL0403S01
The time control unit totally controls the following body electrical system operations.
I Warning chime
I Rear defogger
I Power door lock
I Interior lamp
System Input Output

Door switches
Power door lock Door lock actuator
Door unlock sensor
Key switch (Insert)

Warning chime Lighting switch (1st) Warning chime (located in time control unit)
Door unlock sensor

Rear window defogger Rear window defogger relay
Rear window defogger switch
Door switches
Front door unlock sensor
Interior lamp Interior lamp
Key switch (Insert)
EL-616
TIME CONTROL UNIT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL421B
EL-617
TIME CONTROL UNIT
Time Control Unit Inspection Table/Sedan for Europe
Time Control Unit Inspection Table/Sedan for

Europe NJEL0405
Voltage
Terminal Wire
Connections Operation condition (Approximate
No. color
values)
1 R/B Power source (Fuse) — 12V
Free 0V
3 G/R Super lock actuator Door key cylinder switch
Unlocked 12V
Passenger and rear doors lock Free 0V

4 R/B Door lock/unlock switch
actuator Unlocked 12V
Free 0V
6 L/R Super lock actuator Door key cylinder switch
Locked 12V
10 W/L Power source (C/B) — 12V
Free 0V
11 L Driver’s door lock actuator Door lock/unlock switch
Unlocked 12V
Free 0V
14 W/R Door lock actuator Door lock/unlock switch
Locked 12V
16 B Ground — 0V
18 L/W Ignition key switch (Insert) Key inserted , key removed from IGN key cylinder 12V , 0V
19 R/G Lighting switch 1ST, 2ND position: ON , OFF 12V , 0V
20 PU/W Door lock/Unlock switch Neutral , Locks 5V , 0V
23 PU/R Door lock/Unlock switch Neutral , Unlocks 5V , 0V
24 LG/R Door key cylinder switch OFF (Neutral) , ON (Locked) 5V , 0V
25 W/L Door key cylinder switch OFF (Neutral) , ON (Unlocked) 5V , 0V
When interior room lamp is operated using remote con-

troller (Lamp switch is “DOOR” position)
27 G/W Rear window defogger relay OFF , ON (Ignition key is in “ON” position) 12V , 0V
28 Y/R Driver door unlock sensor Driver door: Locked , Unlocked 5V , 0V
29 Y/L Passenger door unlock sensor Passenger door: Locked , Unlocked 5V , 0V
30 R Door switch driver side OFF (closed) , ON (open) 5V , 0V
31 R/W Passenger and rear doors switch OFF (closed) , ON (open) 5V , 0V
Remote controller lock button is pushed.

32 GY Multi-remote control unit 0V , 5V
(Ignition switch is not at “ON” position)
Remote controller unlock button is pushed.

33 PU Multi-remote control unit 0V , 5V
(Ignition switch is not at “ON” position)
35 L/Y Rear window defogger switch OFF , ON 5V , 0V
EL-618
TIME CONTROL UNIT
Description/Hatchback
Description/Hatchback =NJEL0485
The TCU has the following functions.
GI
INTERIOR LAMP TIMER NJEL0485S01
The interior lamp timer is controlled by the TCU.
For further information, refer to “INTERIOR ROOM LAMP” (EL-169). MA
IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME AND LIGHT WARNING CHIME NJEL0485S02
The ignition key and light warning chime are controlled by the TCU. EM
For further information, refer to “WARNING CHIME” (EL-278).
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER TIMER NJEL0485S03 LC
The rear window defogger and door mirror defogger system are controlled by the TCU.
For further information, refer to “REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER” (EL-342).
POWER DOOR LOCK (SUPER LOCK) EC
NJEL0485S04
The power door lock (super lock) is controlled by the TCU.
For further information, refer to “POWER DOOR LOCK — Super Lock —” (EL-484). FE
MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM NJEL0485S05
The multi-remote control system is controlled by the TCU. CL
For further information, refer to “MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM” (EL-565).
FUNCTION
I The TCU has the following control function.
NJEL0485S06
MT
Item Details of control
AT
Switches the director indicators (Left, Right or All) when the combination
Direction indicators
switch or hazard switch is operated.
Sounds warning chime when driver’s door is opened with light switch in the AX
Light warning chime
1st or 2nd position and ignition switch “OFF”.
Sounds warning chime when driver’s door is opened with key in ignition and SU
Ignition key warning chine the driver door lock knob (unlock sensor) is moved from the “unlock” posi-
tion to the “lock” position.
Rear window defogger timer

Turn off rear window defogger and door mirror heater, if equipped, about 15 BR
minutes after the rear window defogger switch is turned “ON”.
Shuts off interior lamp in 30 minutes if any door is left open when ignition
Battery saver switch is “OFF”. The battery saver will reset if ignition switch is cycled or any
ST
door is opened or closed.
Keep interior lamp illuminated for about 30 seconds when: RS

I driver’s door is unlocked,
I the ignition is switched off,
Interior lamp timer I driver’s door is opened and then closed. BT
The timer is cancelled, and interior lamp turns off when:
I driver’s door is locked, or
I ignition switch is turned “ON”.
HA
Power door lock Centrally locks and unlocks the vehicle
Super lock Activates and de-activates the super lock system. SC

The Timer Control Unit includes software to help during development testing, manufacturing and service. It
allows the technician to put it into Diagnostic Mode. In this mode, all switch inputs can be tested for continu-
ity.
When the timer control unit is in Diagnostic Mode, the control unit tests the component and indicate the result IDX
by the hazard lamp flashing.
EL-619
TIME CONTROL UNIT
SEL496X
Checks
Once in Diagnostic Mode, the following inputs can be tested.
USER ACTION TCU Reaction COMPONENT TESTED
Driver’s door opened from closed (all

Hazard flash once Driver’s door open signal
other doors closed)
Passenger or rear door opened from

Hazard flash once Door open signal for opened door
closed (all other doors closed)
Driver’s door locked from unlocked Hazard flash once Driver’s door unlock sensor signal
Passenger door locked from unlocked Hazard flash once Assist door unlock sensor signal
Hazard switch is pressed from off Hazard flash once Hazard switch signal
Turn signal switch is moved to left from

Hazard flash once Left turn signal
off
Turn signal switch is moved to right from

Hazard flash once Right turn signal
off
Key turned to lock position is door Hazard flash once* Key cylinder lock switch signal
Lighting switch turned 1st position or 2nd

Hazard flash once Tail lamp signal
position from off
Key put in ignition from out Hazard flash once Key in detect signal
Door lock/unlock switch is pressed Hazard flash once Central door lock/unlock signal
EL-620
TIME CONTROL UNIT
*) Hazard may flash a second time because of Driver’s door status signal change. The min. delay time between flash actions is 100
ms.
In case the system does not operate as described above, check the concerned circuit for open or short. After GI
completion, the Diagnostic Mode can be switched off by pressing the rear defogger switch or by turning the
ignition to “ON”. The hazard lamp will flash at 3 Hz for 3 seconds to confirm that Diagnostic Mode has been
switched off. MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-621
TIME CONTROL UNIT
Schematic/Hatchback
MEL230M
EL-622
TIME CONTROL UNIT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL231M
EL-623
NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Component Parts and Harness Connetor Location
Component Parts and Harness Connetor

Location NJEL0406
SEL025X
EL-624
System Description
System Description =NJEL0407

NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft System) has the following immobilizer functions:
I Since only NATS ignition keys, whose ID nos. have been registered into the ECM and IMMU of NATS, GI
allow the engine to run, operation of a stolen vehicle without a NATS registered key is prevented by NATS.
That is to say, NATS will immobilize the engine if someone tries to start it without the registered key of
NATS.
MA
I This version of NATS has dongle unit to improve its anti-theft performance (RHD models for Europe).
Dongle unit has its own ID which is registered into NATS IMMU. So if dongle unit is replaced, initialization EM
must be carried out.
I When malfunction of dongle unit is detected:
The security indicator lamp illuminates for about 15 minutes after ignition switch is turned to ON. LC
− When dongle unit has a malfunction and the indicator lamp is illuminated, engine can not be started.
However engine can be started only one time when security indicator lamp turns off in about 15 minutes
after ignition switch is turned to ON. EC
I All of the originally supplied ignition key IDs have been NATS registered.
If requested by the vehicle owner, a maximum of five key IDs can be registered into the NATS compo-
nents. FE
I The security indicator blinks when the ignition switch is in “OFF” or “ACC” position. Therefore, NATS warns
outsiders that the vehicle is equipped with the anti-theft system. CL
I When NATS detects trouble, the security indicator lamp lights up as follows.
With dongle Without dongle
Condition IGN ON and MT
MIL Security indicator MIL Security indicator
1. 6 times blinking AT
NATS malfunction
2. Staying ON after igni-
(except dongle unit) is — — Staying ON
tion switch is turned
detected
ON
AX
Staying ON for about 15
Only malfunction of
— minutes after ignition — —
dongle unit is detected.
switch is turned ON SU
1. 6 times blinking
Malfunction of NATS
2. Staying ON after igni-
and engine related parts Staying ON
tion switch is turned
Staying ON Staying ON BR
are detected.
ON
Only engine related part

Staying ON — Staying ON — ST
malfunction is detected.
Just after initialization of

NATS
— 6 times blinking — — RS
I NATS trouble diagnoses, system initialization and additional registration of other NATS ignition key IDs
must be carried out using CONSULT-II hardware and CONSULT-II NATS software. BT
Regarding the procedures of NATS initialization and NATS ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II
operation manual, NATS.
I When servicing a malfunction of the NATS (indicated by lighting up of Security Indicator Lamp) or
HA
registering another NATS ignition key ID no., it may be necessary to re-register original key iden-
tification. Therefore, be sure to receive ALL KEYS from vehicle owner. SC
IDX
EL-625
System Composition
System Composition =NJEL0408

The immobilizer function of the NATS consists of the following:
I NATS ignition key
I NATS immobilizer control unit (IMMU) located in the ignition key cylinder
I Engine control module (ECM)
I Dongle unit (RHD models for Europe)
I Security indicator
SEL032X
EL-626
Wiring Diagram — NATS —/Sedan For Europe
Wiring Diagram — NATS —/Sedan For Europe NJEL0409

GASOLINE ENGINE MODELS NJEL0409S01
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL422B
EL-627
Wiring Diagram — NATS —/Sedan For Europe (Cont’d)
DIESEL ENGINE MODELS NJEL0409S02
HEL423B
EL-628
Wiring Diagram — NATS —/Hatchback
Wiring Diagram — NATS —/Hatchback NJEL0487
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL932L
EL-629
Wiring Diagram — NATS —/For Australia and the Middle East
Wiring Diagram — NATS —/For Australia and

the Middle East NJEL0528
HEL496B
EL-630
CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II NJEL0410
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
NJEL0410S01
GI
2. Insert NATS program card into CONSULT-II.
: Program card MA
NATS (AEN00A/AEN01B)
3. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector.
EM
SEF094Y LC
EC
FE
CL
PBR455D
MT
6. Select “NATS V.5.0”.
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL027X
7. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service

procedure. ST
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation
Manual, NATS. RS
BT
HA
SEL150X
CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE FUNCTION NJEL0410S02 SC

CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST
Description
MODE
C/U INITIALIZATION When replacing any of the following components, C/U initialization and re-registration of all
NATS ignition keys are necessary.
[NATS ignition key/IMMU/ECM/Dongle unit] IDX
SELF-DIAG RESULTS Detected items (screen terms) are as shown in the chart EL-632.
EL-631
NOTE:
I When any initialization is performed, all ID previously reg-
istered will be erased and all NATS ignition keys must be
registered again.
I The engine cannot be started with an unregistered key. In this
case, the system may show “DIFFERENCE OF KEY” or
“LOCK MODE” as a self-diagnostic result on the CONSULT-II
screen.
I When initialization is performed for RHD models for Europe,
security indicator will flash six times to demonstrate recognition
of the dongle unit ID.
I In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored as a
self-diagnostic result during key registration procedure, even if
the system is not malfunctioning.
HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS NJEL0410S03
SEL151X
NATS SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ITEM CHART NJEL0410S04
P No. Code Malfunction is detected when .....

Detected items (NATS program card (Self-diag-
Reference page
screen terms) nostic result
of “ENGINE”
NATS MAL- The malfunction of ECM internal circuit of IMMU com-

ECM INT CIRC-IMMU FUNCTION munication line is detected. EL-637
P1613
Communication impossible between ECM and IMMU

NATS MAL-
(In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU FUNCTION EL-638
during key registration procedure, even if the system is
P1612
not malfunctioning.)
NATS MAL- IMMU can receive the key ID signal but the result of ID
DIFFERENCE OF KEY FUNCTION verification between key ID and IMMU is NG. EL-642
P1615
NATS MAL- IMMU cannot receive the key ID signal.

CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY FUNCTION EL-643
P1614
EL-632
P No. Code Malfunction is detected when .....

Detected items (NATS program card (Self-diag-
screen terms) nostic result
Reference page GI
of “ENGINE”
NATS MAL- The result of ID verification between IMMU and ECM is MA

ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM FUNCTION NG. System initialization is required. EL-645
P1611
When the starting operation is carried out five or more EM

times consecutively under the following conditions,
NATS MAL-
NATS will shift the mode to one which prevents the
LOCK MODE FUNCTION EL-648
P1610
engine from being started. LC
I Unregistered ignition key is used.
I IMMU or ECM’s malfunctioning.
DON’T ERASE BEFORE All engine trouble codes except NATS trouble code has
EC
— EL-634
CHECKING ENG DIAG been detected in ECM.
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-633
Trouble Diagnoses

WORK FLOW NJEL0411S01
SEL729WE
EL-634
SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1 NJEL0411S02
(Self-diagnosis related item)
GI
Displayed “SELF-DIAG DIAGNOSTIC PROCE- SYSTEM REFERENCE PART
SYMPTOM RESULTS” on CON- DURE (Malfunctioning part or NO. OF ILLUSTRATION
SULT-II screen. (Reference page) mode) ON SYSTEM DIAGRAM
MA
PROCEDURE 1
ECM INT CIRC-IMMU ECM B
(EL-637)
EM
In rare case, “CHAIN
OF ECM-IMMU” might
be stored during key
registration procedure,
— LC
even if the system is not
malfunctioning.
EC
Open circuit in battery
voltage line of IMMU C1
circuit FE
Open circuit in ignition
C2
line of IMMU circuit
CL
Open circuit in ground
C3
line of IMMU circuit
PROCEDURE 2
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU
(EL-638) Open circuit in commu- MT
nication line between C4
IMMU and ECM
AT
Short circuit between
IMMU and ECM com-
C4
munication line and bat- AX
tery voltage line
I Security indicator Short circuit between
lighting up* IMMU and ECM com-
C4
SU
I Engine cannot be munication line and
started ground line
ECM B
BR
IMMU A
ST
PROCEDURE 3 Unregistered key D
DIFFERENCE OF KEY
(EL-642) IMMU A
RS
Malfunction of key ID
E
chip
IMMU A BT
Open circuit in ground
PROCEDURE 4 C6
CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY
(EL-643)
line of dongle unit circuit HA
Open or short circuit in
line between IMMU and C5
dongle unit SC
Dongle unit G
System initialization has

PROCEDURE 5 F
ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM not yet been completed.
(EL-645)
ECM B IDX
PROCEDURE 7
LOCK MODE LOCK MODE D
(EL-648)
EL-635
Displayed “SELF-DIAG DIAGNOSTIC PROCE- SYSTEM REFERENCE PART

SYMPTOM RESULTS” on CON- DURE (Malfunctioning part or NO. OF ILLUSTRATION
SULT-II screen. (Reference page) mode) ON SYSTEM DIAGRAM
I MIL staying ON DON’T ERASE Engine trouble data and

WORK FLOW
I Security indicator BEFORE CHECKING NATS trouble data have —
(EL-634)
lighting up* ENG DIAG been detected in ECM
*: When NATS detects trouble, the security indicator lights up while ignition key is in the “ON” position.
*: When the vehicle is equipped with a dongle unit (RHD models for Europe), the security indicator blinks 6 times just after the ignition
switch is turned to ON. Then the security indicator lights up while the ignition key is in the “ON” position.
SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 2 NJEL0411S03

(Non self-diagnosis related item)
REFERENCE PART NO. OF
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE SYSTEM
SYMPTOM ILLUSTRATION ON SYSTEM
(Reference page) (Malfunctioning part or mode)
DIAGRAM
Security ind. —
Open circuit between Fuse and

—
PROCEDURE 6 IMMU
Security ind. does not light up.
(EL-646) Continuation of initialization
—
mode
IMMU A
NATS might be initialized with-

Security ind. does not blink just out connecting dongle unit —
after initialization even if the properly.
vehicle is equipped with dongle
unit. Open circuit in ground line of
C6
dongle unit circuit
PROCEDURE 8
Security ind. does not blink just (EL-650)
Open or short circuit in com-
after ignition switch is turned to munication line between IMMU C5
ON when some malfunction and dongle unit
related to NATS is detected
even if the vehicle is equipped
with dongle unit. Dongle unit G
DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM NJEL0411S04
SEL028X
EL-636
Self-diagnostic results:
“ECM INT CIRC-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen GI
1. Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “ECM INT CIRC-
IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen. Ref. part No. B.
2. Replace ECM.
MA
3. Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual EM
NATS”.
SEL152X LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-637
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 =NJEL0411S06
“CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
1 CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
NOTE:
In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored during key registration procedure, even if the system is not mal-
functioning.
SEL366X
Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as above?

Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1.
2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR IMMU

1. Disconnect IMMU connector.
2. Check voltage between terminal 8 of IMMU and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEL302WB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Check the following
I 10A fuse (No. 36, located in the fusible link and fuse box) — (Gasoline engine)
I 20A fuse (No. 34, located in the fusible link and fuse box) — (Diesel engine)
I Harness for open or short between fuse and IMMU connector
Ref. Part No. C1
EL-638
3 CHECK IGN SW. ON SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch ON. GI
2. Check voltage between terminal 7 of IMMU and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
MA
EM
LC
SEL303WL
EC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. FE
NG © Check the following
I 10A fuse [No. 20, located in the fuse block (J/B)] (Hatchback) CL
I 10A fuse [No. 20, located in the fuse block (J/B)] (Sedan)
I Harness for open or short between fuse and IMMU connector
Ref. part No. C2 MT
4 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR IMMU

AT
1. Turn ignition OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between IMMU terminal 4 and ground.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL304WB
OK or NG RS
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair harness. Ref. part No. C3 BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-639
5 CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE OPEN CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect ECM connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 44 or 116 (Gasoline engine) or 410 (Diesel engine) and IMMU termi-
nal 1.
SEL940X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
Ref. part No. C4
6 CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE BATTERY SHORT CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 44 or 116 (Gasoline engine) or 410 (Diesel engine) or IMMU terminal 1 and
ground.
SEL941X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Communication line is short-circuited with battery voltage line or ignition switch ON line.
Repair harness or connectors.
Ref. part No. C4
EL-640
7 CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE GROUND SHORT CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. GI
2. Check continuity between ECM terminal 44 or 116 (Gasoline engine) or 410 (Diesel engine) or IMMU terminal 1 and
ground.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL942X
OK or NG FE
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Communication line is short-circuited with ground line. CL
Repair harness or connectors.
Ref. part No. C4
MT
8 SIGNAL FROM ECM TO IMMU CHECK
1. Check the signal between ECM terminal, 44 or 116 (Gasoline engine) or 410 (Diesel engine) and ground with CON- AT
SULT-II or oscilloscope when ignition switch is turned “ON”.
2. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 750 msec. just after ignition switch is
turned “ON”. AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL730W RS
OK or NG
OK © IMMU is malfunctioning. BT
Replace IMMU. Ref. part No. A
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For the operation of initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS”. HA
NG © ECM is malfunctioning.
Replace ECM. Ref. part No. B
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. SC
For the operation of initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS”.
IDX
EL-641
“DIFFERENCE OF KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “DIFFERENCE OF KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
SEL367X

Yes © GO TO 2.
2 PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II

Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. Re-register all NATS ignition key IDs.
For initialization and registration of NATS ignition key IDs, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual NATS”.
SEL297W
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or fails, CONSULT-II shows above message on the screen.
Can the system be initialized and can the engine be started with re-registered NATS ignition key?
Yes © Ignition key ID was unregistered. Ref. part No. D
No © IMMU is malfunctioning.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual NATS”.
EL-642
“CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen GI
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen. MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL368X FE
Yes © GO TO 2. CL
MT
2 CHECK NATS IGNITION KEY ID CHIP
Start engine with another registered NATS ignition key.
AT
Does the engine start?
Yes © Ignition key ID chip is malfunctioning.
Replace the ignition key.
AX
Ref. part No. E
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS”. SU
No © Models without dongle unit
IMMU is malfunctioning. BR
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS”. ST
Models with dongle unit
GO TO 3.
RS
3 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR CONNECTION
Check harness connector connection between M31 and M102. BT
Does the engine start?
Yes © System is OK. (The malfunction is caused by improper connector connection.) HA
No © GO TO 4.
SC
IDX
EL-643
4 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR DONGLE UNIT

Check continuity between dongle unit terminal 1 and ground.
SEL029X
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 5.
No © Repair harness.
5 CHECK INTERFACE CIRCUIT
SEL030X
Yes or No
Yes © Dongle unit is malfunctioning.
1. Replace dongle unit.
2. Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For the initialization procedure, refer to “CON-
SULT-II operation manual NATS.
EL-644
“ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM” displayed on CONSULT-II screen GI
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM” displayed on CONSULT-II screen. MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL369X FE
NOTE:
“ID DISCORD IMMU-ECM”:
Registered ID of IMMU is in discord with that of ECM. CL
Yes © GO TO 2. MT
AT
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. Re-register all NATS ignition key IDs.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL297W
RS
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or fails, CONSULT-II shows above message on the screen.
BT
Can the system be initialized?
Yes © Start engine. (END)
(System initialization had not been completed. Ref. part No. B) HA
No © ECM is malfunctioning.
Replace ECM. Ref. part No. B SC
IDX
EL-645
“SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP”
1 CHECK FUSE
Check 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
Is 10A fuse OK?
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Replace fuse.

1. Install 10A fuse.
2. Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS”.
4. Start engine and turn ignition switch OFF.
5. Check the security indicator lamp lighting.
Security indicator lamp should be light up.
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © GO TO 3.
3 CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect security indicator lamp connector.
2. Check voltage between security indicator lamp connector terminal 2 and ground.
SEL031X
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Check harness for open or short between fuse and security indicator lamp.

Check security Indicator Lamp.
Is security indicator lamp OK?
Yes © GO TO 5.
No © Replace security indicator lamp.
EL-646
5 CHECK IMMU FUNCTION

1. Connect IMMU connector. GI
2. Disconnect security indicator lamp connector.
3. Check continuity between IMMU terminal 5 (Sedan) or 6 (Hatchback) and ground.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL485X
OK or NG FE
OK © Check harness for open or short between security indicator lamp and IMMU.
NG © IMMU is malfunctioning. CL
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual NATS”. MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-647
“LOCK MODE” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “LOCK MODE” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
SEL371X

Yes © GO TO 2.
2 ESCAPE FROM LOCK MODE

2. Turn ignition switch ON with registered key. (Do not start engine.) Wait 5 seconds.
3. Return the key to OFF position.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 twice (total of three cycles).
5. Start the engine.
Does engine start?
Yes © System is OK.
(Now system is escaped from “LOCK MODE”.)
No © GO TO 3.
3 CHECK IMMU ILLUSTRATION

Check IMMU installation. Refer to “How to Replace IMMU” in EL-651.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Reinstall IMMU correctly.
EL-648

Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL297W
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or fails, CONSULT-II shows the above message on the screen. FE
Yes © System is OK.
CL
No © GO TO 5.
MT
5 PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II AGAIN
1. Replace IMMU.
2. Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL297W
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or fails, CONSULT-II shows the above message on the screen. RS
Yes © System is OK. (IMMU is malfunctioning. Ref. part No. A) BT
No © ECM is malfunctioning.
Replace ECM. Ref. part No. B
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. HA
SC
IDX
EL-649
1 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR CONNECTION

Check harness connector connection between M31 and M102.
Then initialize NATS. For the initialization operation, refer to “CONSULT-II operation NATS”.
Does the security indicator blink just after initialization?
Yes © System is OK. (The malfunction is caused by improper connector connection.)
No © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR DONGLE UNIT

Check continuity between dongle unit terminal 1 and ground.
SEL029X
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 3.
3 CHECK INTERFACE CIRCUIT
SEL030X
Yes or No
Yes © Dongle unit is malfunctioning.
1. Replace dongle unit.
2. Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For the initialization procedure, refer to “CON-
SULT-II Operation Manual NATS”.
EL-650
How to Replace NATS IMMU
How to Replace NATS IMMU NJEL0412

NOTE:
I If NATS IMMU is not installed correctly, NATS system will GI
not operate properly and SELF-DIAG RESULTS on CON-
SULT-II screen will show “LOCK MODE”.
MA
EM
SEL096WC LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-651
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Precautions
Precautions NJEL0514
WARNING:
Do not attempt to disassemble the monitor. Parts of the monitor have high voltages that can result in
severe and dangerous electric shock.
CAUTION:
I Do not reverse battery connections.
I Do not attach unauthorized parts.
I Protect the unit from severe impact.
NOTE:
Before beginning repair, determine whether or not the unit is defective. Refer to “This Condition Is Not
Abnormal” (EL-700).
EL-652
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Component Parts Location
Component Parts Location NJEL0515
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEL501X
IDX
EL-653
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description

OUTLINE NJEL0516S01
The Navigation System (Multi-AV System) relies upon three sens-
ing devices in order to determine vehicle location at regular time
intervals.
1. Vehicle speed sensor: Determines the distance the vehicle has
traveled.
2. Gyro (Angular velocity sensor): Determines vehicle steering
angle and directional change.
3. GPS antenna (GPS data): Determines vehicle forward move-
SEL504X
ment and direction.
The data provided by the three sensing functions together with a
comparison of the mapping information read from the CD-ROM
drive permit accurate determination of the vehicle’s current location
and subsequent course (map matching). The information appears
on a liquid crystal display.
This comparison of GPS data (vehicle position sensing) and map
matching permits precise determination of vehicle location.
Position Sensor Operating Principles NJEL0516S0101

The sensor determines current vehicle location by calculating the
previously sensed position, the distance traveled from this position,
and the directional changes occurring during this travel.
1. Distance traveled
The distance traveled is calculated using signals received from
the vehicle speed sensor. The sensor automatically compen-
sates for the slightly reduced wheel and tire diameter resulting
from tire wear.
2. Forward movement (Direction)
SEL684V Changes in the direction of forward movement are calculated
by the gyro (angular velocity sensor) and the GPS antenna
(GPS data). Each of these functions has its advantage and
disadvantages. Depending upon conditions, one function takes
precedence over the other to accurately determine the direc-
tion of forward movement.
Function type Advantage Disadvantage
I Calculation errors may

Gyro (Angular I Able to accurately detect
accumulate over a long
velocity sen- minute changes in steering
period of continuous
sor) angle and direction.
vehicle travel.
I Able to sense vehicle travel

I Unable to detect direction
GPS antenna in four general directions
of vehicle travel at low
(GPS data) (North, South, East, and
vehicle speeds.
West)
EL-654
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Map Matching NJEL0516S0102
Map matching allows the driver to compare the sensed vehicle
location data with the road map contained in the CD-ROM drive. GI
Vehicle position is marked on the CD-ROM map. This permits the
driver to accurately determine his/her present position on the high-
way and to make appropriate course decisions. MA
When GPS data reception is poor during travel, the vehicle posi-
tion is not amended. At this time, manual manipulation of the CD-
ROM map position marker is required. EM
SEL685V LC
Map matching permits the driver to make priority judgments about
possible appropriate roads other than the one currently being trav-
eled. EC
If there is an error in the distance or direction of travel, there will
also be an error in the relative position of other routes. When two
routes are closely parallel to one another, the indicated position for FE
both routes will be nearly the same priority. This is so that, slight
changes in the steering direction may cause the marker to indicate
both routes alternately. CL
SEL686V
MT
Newly constructed roads may not appear on the CD-ROM map. In
this case, map matching is not possible. Changes in the course of AT
a road will also prevent accurate map matching.
When driving on a road not shown on the CD-ROM map, the posi-
tion marker used for map matching may indicate a different route. AX
Even after returning to a route shown on the map, the position
marker may jump to the position currently detected.
SU
BR
SEL687V
GPS (Global Positioning System)

GPS is the global positioning system developed and operated by
NJEL0516S0103 ST
the US Department of Defense. GPS satellites (NAVSTAR) trans-
mit radio waves and orbit around the earth at an altitude of approxi- RS
mately 21,000 km (13,000 miles).
GPS receiver calculates the three-dimensional position of the
vehicle (latitude, longitude, and altitude from the sea level) by the BT
time difference of the radio wave arriving from more than four GPS
satellites (three-dimensional positioning).
When the radio wave is received from only three GPS satellites, the HA
two-dimensional position (latitude and longitude) is calculated,
SEL526V
using the altitude from the sea level data calculated by using four
GPS satellites (two-dimensional positioning). SC
Positioning capability is degraded in the following cases.
I In two-dimensional positioning, when the vehicle’s altitude
from the sea level changes, the precision becomes lower.
I The location detection performance can have an error of about
100 m (300 ft) even in three-dimensional positioning with high IDX
precision. Because the precision is influenced by the location
of GPS satellites used for positioning, the location detection
performance may drop depending on the location of GPS sat-
ellites.
EL-655
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
I When the radio wave from GPS satellites cannot be received,
for example, when the vehicle is in a tunnel, in a parking lot
inside building, under an elevated superhighway or near strong
power lines, the location may not be detected. Turbulent/
electric weather conditions may also affect positioning perfor-
mance. If something is placed on the antenna, the radio wave
from GPS satellites may not be received.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NJEL0516S02

NAVI Control Unit NJEL0516S0201
I The gyro (angular speed sensor) and the CD-ROM drive are
built-in units that control the navigation functions.
I Signals are received from the gyro, the vehicle speed sensor,
and the GPS antenna. Vehicle location is determined by com-
bining this data with the data contained in the CD-ROM map.
Locational information is shown on liquid crystal display panel.
SEL507X
CD-ROM Driver NJEL0516S0202

Maps, traffic control regulations, and other pertinent information
can be easily red from the CD-ROM disc.
SEL506X
Map CD-ROM NJEL0516S0203

I The map CD-ROM has maps, traffic control regulations, and
other pertinent information.
I To improve CD-ROM map matching and route determination
functions, the CD-ROM uses an exclusive Nissan format.
Therefore, the use of a CD-ROM provided by other manufac-
turers cannot be used.
Gyro (Angular Speed Sensor) NJEL0516S0204

I The oscillator gyro sensor is used to detect changes in vehicle
steering angle.
I The oscillator gyro periodically senses oscillatory variation at
the oscillation terminals. This variation is caused by changes
in the vehicle angular velocity. Voltage variations are sensed
by ceramic voltage sensors at the left and right sides of the
terminals. Vehicle angular velocity corresponds directly with
these changes in voltage.
I The gyro is built into the navigation (NAVI) control unit.
SEL690V
EL-656
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
BIRDVIEWT NJEL0516S0205
The BIRDVIEWT provides a detailed and easily seen display of
road conditions covering the vehicle’s immediate to distant area. GI
MA
EM
MAP DISPLAY LC
EC
FE
CL
BIRDVIEW R
SEL524X
MT
I Display area: Trapezoidal representation showing approximate AT
distances (Wn, D, and Wd).
I Ten horizontal grid lines indicate display width while six verti-
cal grid lines indicate display depth and direction. AX
I Drawing line area shows open space, depth, and immediate
front area. Each area is to a scale of approximately 5:6:25.
SU
I Pushing the “ZOOM IN” button during operation displays the
scale change and the view point height on the left side of the
screen. BR
The height of the view point increases or decreases when
“ZOOM” or “WIDE” is selected with the joystick.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL691V
SC
IDX
EL-657
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
MAP DISPLAY =NJEL0516S03
SEL525X
Function of each icon is as follows:

1) Azimuth indication
2) Position marker
The tip of the arrow shows the current position. The shaft of
the arrow indicates the direction in which the vehicle is travel-
ing.
3) GPS reception signal (indicates current reception conditions)
4) Distance display (shows the distance in a reduced scale)
EL-658
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
FUNCTION OF PANEL SWITCH =NJEL0516S04
Display with Pushed “DEST” Switch NJEL0516S0401
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SEL615X
MT
The function of each icon is as follows:
Icon Description AT
Address Book Favorite areas can be saved to memory.
Address (City/Street) The information can be searched from the address. AX

Point of Interest (POI) The information of favorite areas can be searched.
The previous ten destinations stored in memory are

SU
Previous Dest.
displayed.
City Centre The information can be searched from city name. BR

Map The information can be searched from the map.
When two or more countries are included in a map ST

Country CD-ROM, the destination can be searched for under
the country name.
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-659
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Display with Pushed “ROUTE” Switch =NJEL0516S0402
SEL526X
The function of each icon is as follows:

Icon Description
Select facility is set as destination or waypoint.

Quick Stop (Route guidance has been turned OFF or the destina-
tion has been reached.)
Next current and previous street names can be dis-

Where am I?
played.
The following items can be set.

I Complete Route
I Turn List
Route Info.*
I Route Simulation
(Displayed only when the destination area has been
set.)
Based on the selected distance, an alternative route is

searched.
Detour*
[Displayed only when the recommended route (not its
reverse) is followed.]
Change the destination or add the transit points of the

route set in the route guide. (Displayed only when the
Edit Route*
automatic reroute function has been turned OFF and
the recommended route is not followed.)
Search for a recommended route between the vehi-

cle’s current location and the destination area.
Route Calc.
(Displayed only when the destination area has been
set.)
*: When destinations have been entered, route guidance OFF or destination have
been reached, “Route Info.”, “Detour”, “Edit Route” and “Route Clac.” are not
displayed.
EL-660
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Display with Pushed “SETTING” Switch =NJEL0516S0403
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SEL614X
The function of each icon is as follows: MT

Icon Description
The current location can be stored in the Address

AT
Save Current Location
Book.
System Setting
Many adjustments and settings can be made for maxi- AX
mum driving pleasure and convenience.
Edit Address Book The Address Book data can be edited.

SU
The volume and/or on/off of voice prompt can be con-
Guidance Volume
trolled by the joystick.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-661
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Schematic
Schematic NJEL0517
HEL424B
EL-662
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — NAVI —
Wiring Diagram — NAVI — NJEL0518

GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL425B
EL-663
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — NAVI — (Cont’d)
HEL426B
EL-664
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL427B
EL-665
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
HEL428B
EL-666
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL429B
EL-667
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
HEL430B
EL-668
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Self-diagnosis Mode
Self-diagnosis Mode NJEL0519

APPLICATION ITEMS NJEL0519S01
GI
Reference
Mode Description
page
MA
Self-diagnosis for Navigation, Display and GPS Antenna
Self Diagnosis EL-670
connection.
Color and gray gradation of display can be checked in EM

Diagnose the Display EL-678
this mode.
Several input signals to NAVI control unit, can be moni- LC

Diagnosis for Signals from the Car EL-676
tored in this mode.
Check the map CD- The version (parts number) of inserted CD-ROM can be
EL-677 EC
ROM version checked in this model.
Diagnosis results previously stored in the memory

(before turning ignition switch ON) are displayed in this FE
Error history EL-672
mode. Time and location when/where the errors
occurred are also displayed.
Longitude & Latitude

Display the map. Use the joystick to adjust position. Lon-
EL-679
CL
Confirmation/ gitude and latitude will be displayed.
adjustment Navigation
Turning angle of the vehicle on the display can be
Adjust the Angle
adjusted in this mode.
EL-680 MT
Under ordinary conditions, the navigation system dis-
tance measuring function will automatically compensate AT
for minute decreases in wheel and tire diameter caused
Speed Calibration by tire wear or low pressure. Speed calibration immedi- EL-681
ately restores system accuracy in cases such as when AX
distance calibration is needed because of the use of tire
chains in inclement weather.
This mode is for initializing the current location. Use SU

Initialize Location when the vehicle is transported a long distance by a EL-682
trailer, etc.
BR
HOW TO PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE

NJEL0519S02 ST
2. Push “OPEN/CLOSE” switch and then open the display.
3. Push both of “MAP” and “MODE” switches at the same time for RS
MAP
more than five seconds.
MODE
BT
HA
SEL617X
4. Select “Self Diagnosis” or “Confirmation/ adjustment”. SC

I For further procedure, refer to the following pages which
describe each application item of the self-diagnosis mode.
IDX
SEL527X
EL-669
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Self-diagnosis Mode (Cont’d)
“Self Diagnosis” NJEL0519S0201
3. Push both “MAP” and “MODE” switches at the same time for
more than 5 seconds.
4. Select “Self Diagnosis”.
SEL527X
5. Self-diagnosis will be performed.
SEL528X
6. Diagnosis results will be displayed. Diagnosis results are indi-

cated by display color. For details refer to EL-671, “SELF-DI-
AGNOSIS RESULTS”.
SEL529X
To obtain detailed diagnosis results on the screen, touch “Naviga-

tion” or “Display” or “GPS Antenna”.
SEL530X
EL-670
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Self-diagnosis Mode (Cont’d)
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS =NJEL0519S03
Diagnoses/service procedure GI
Recheck system at each check or
Diagnosed Displayed
Detailed result Description replacement (When malfunction is
item color
eliminated, further repair work is
not required.)
MA
GPS antenna is connected to NAVI
Green — —
control unit correctly. EM
“GPS
Antenna” 1. Check GPS antenna feeder cable
(GPS Connection to the follow- connection at NAVI control unit.
antenna ing unit is abnormal. See GPS antenna connection error is 2. Visually check GPS antenna
LC
Yellow
connection) the Service Manual for detected. feeder cable. If NG, replace GPS
further diagnosis. antenna assembly.
3. Replace GPS antenna. EC
Green — No failure is detected. —
Red [*** is abnormal.] NAVI control unit is malfunctioning. Replace NAVI control unit. FE
Self-diagnosis for CD-
1. Confirm that map CD-ROM is not
Gray
ROM DRIVER of NAVI Any CD-ROM is not inserted or
inserted into NAVI control unit. CL
was not conducted due to NAVI control unit is malfunctioning.
2. Replace NAVI control unit.
no insertion of CD-ROM.
1. Confirm the disc is installed cor- MT

CD-ROM or CD-ROM
NAVI control unit judges that rectly (not up side down.)
DRIVER of NAVI is
inserted CD-ROM is malfunctioning. 2. Perform “Check the Map
abnormal. See the Ser-
vice Manual for further
Map CD-ROM or CD-ROM driver of CD-ROM version MODE” in AT
the unit is malfunctioning. EL-677 to confirm whether cor-
“Navigation” diagnosis.
rect CD-ROM is inserted or not.
Inserted map CD-ROM can not be

3. Check the disc surface. Are there AX
any scratches, abrasions or pits
CD-ROM is abnormal. read. on the surface?
Yellow Please check the disc. Map CD-ROM or CD-ROM driver of 4. Replace the CD-ROM. SU
the unit is malfunctioning. 5. Replace NAVI control unit.
1. Check GPS antenna feeder cable

Connection to the follow- connection at NAVI control unit. BR
ing unit is abnormal. See GPS antenna connection error is 2. Visually check GPS antenna
the Service Manual for detected. feeder cable. If NG, replace GPS
further diagnosis. antenna assembly. ST
3. Replace GPS antenna.
NOTE: RS
Connection between NAVI control unit and display unit should
be normal. Therefore, “Display connection error” will not
occur when the display can be opened or closed properly. BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-671
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode =NJEL0520

“ERROR HISTORY” MODE NJEL0520S01
In this mode, historical errors of the system are displayed with the
following data.
I How many times the error was detected
I The last time data when the error was detected
I The last place where the error was detected
NOTE:
I The number of errors can be counted up to 50 times. More
than 51 times will be indicated as 50 times.
I Malfunction of the GPS board (inside the NAVI control
unit) will result in the display of incorrect time data.
I When an error occurs, an incorrect position marker
appears on the display. The accuracy of the display data
(position marker) will be affected.
How to Perform NJEL0520S0102

3. Push both “MAP” and “MODE” switch at the same time for
4. Select “Confirmation/ adjustment”.
SEL527X
5. Select “Navigation”.
SEL531X
6. Select “Error history”.
SEL532X
EL-672
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode (Cont’d)
7. If trouble items are displayed with time count, repair/replace
the system according to “Error history” TABLE, EL-674.
GI
MA
EM
SEL533X LC
8. If necessary, touch error item to display the time when the error
was detected and the place where the error was detected.
EC
FE
CL
SEL534X
MT
9. After repairing the system, erase the diagnosis memory.
NOTE: AT
When the NAVI control unit must be replaced, do not erase the
diagnosis memory for further inspection of malfunctions.
1) Start the engine. AX
2) Push both “Map” and “MODE” switches at the same time for
SU
3) Select “Confirmation/ adjustment”.
4) Select “Navigation”.
5) Select “Error history”. BR
SEL535X
6) Select “Delete”.
7) Select “Yes”.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-673
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“HISTORY OF ERRORS” TABLE =NJEL0520S02
Refer-
Detected items Description Diagnosis/service procedure ence
page
Perform self-diagnosis to confirm

whether the NAVI control unit is mal-
functioning or not. If no failure is
Communications malfunction between
Gyro sensor disconnected detected, a momentary and/or tempo- EL-669
NAVI control unit and internal gyro
rary malfunction may have been caused
by strong electromagnetic wave interfer-
ence.
Check vehicle speed sensor signal in

“Diagnosis for signals from the car”
Connection problem of speed Input malfunction of NAVI control unit mode. If the input signal is not detected
EL-676
sensor and speed sensor correctly, check harness for open or
short between combination meter and
NAVI control unit.
GPS disconnected Perform self-diagnosis to confirm

GPS transmission cable malfunc- Communications malfunction between
detected, a momentary and/or tempo- EL-669
tion NAVI control unit and GPS board
GPS input line connection error ence.
The transmission circuit of the GPS A location error occurs. Strong electro-
GPS TCXO over
board frequency synchronization oscilla- magnetic wave interference may have
tor (inside the NAVI control unit) is send- occurred. The GPS antenna may be in a —
ing an oscillation frequency that is very hot or very cold environment. This
GPS TCXO under
greater or less than the set value. is usually a temporary malfunction.
GPS ROM malfunction Perform self-diagnosis to confirm

Internal malfunction of GPS board RAM whether the NAVI control unit is mal-
or ROM inside the NAVI control unit. functioning or not. If no failure is
GPS RAM malfunction
detected, a momentary and/or tempo- EL-669
Malfunction of GPS board clock IC by strong electromagnetic wave interfer-
GPS RTC malfunction
inside the NAVI control unit. ence.
Perform self-diagnosis to confirm GPS

antenna connection. If no failure is
GPS antenna disconnected — detected, a momentary and/or tempo- EL-669
by a strong impact.
1. Check power supply circuits for NAVI

EL-697
control unit.
2. Perform self-diagnosis to confirm

EL-669
Power supply voltage for GPS board GPS antenna connection.
Low voltage of GPS
inside the NAVI control unit is low.
3. If above diagnosis results are OK, a
momentary and/or temporary malfunc-
—
tion may have been caused by a strong
impact.

CD-ROM driver malfunction (inside the
CD-ROM communication error detected, a momentary and/or tempo- EL-669
NAVI control unit)
ence.
EL-674
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Refer-
Detected items Description Diagnosis/service procedure ence
page GI
Check that whether the disc can be
inserted and ejected correctly. If the MA
Loading mechanism malfunction — —
loading function does not operate
correctly, replace NAVI control unit.
It is confirmed that the appropriate CD- EM

CD-ROM reading error ROM disc is positioned in the CD-ROM Perform self-diagnosis to confirm
loader. However, no data can be read. whether the inserted disc is malfunction- EL-669
ing or not. LC
Malfunctioning of error correction Erroneous data is read from the CD-
for CD-ROM ROM. The errors cannot be corrected.
CD-ROM focus error

CD-ROM data reading beam is out of Rough road driving might create CD
—
EC
focus. skipping like music CD audio unit.

CD-ROM malfunction — whether the inserted disc is malfunction- EL-669
FE
ing or not.
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-675
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“DIAGNOSIS FOR SIGNALS FROM THE CAR” MODE
=NJEL0520S03
In “Diagnosis for Signals from the Car” mode, following input sig-
nals to the NAVI control unit can be checked on the display.
Item Indication Vehicle condition
ON Vehicle speed is greater than 0 km/h (0 MPH).

Vehicle Speed*
OFF Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 MPH).
ON Lighting switch is in 1st or 2nd position.

Light
OFF Lighting switch is in “OFF” position.
ON Ignition switch is in “ON” position.

IGN
OFF Ignition switch is in “ACC” position.
ON Selector/shift lever is in “Reverse” position.

Reverse* Selector/shift lever is in other than “Reverse”
OFF
position.
*: When ignition switch is in “ACC” position, indication will be changed to “-”.

SEL527X
5. Select “Diagnosis for Signals from the Car”.
SEL531X
6. Then “Diagnosis for Signals from the Car” mode is performed.
SEL542X
EL-676
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“CHECK THE MAP CD-ROM VERSION” MODE =NJEL0520S04
How to Perform
NJEL0520S0401
GI
3. Push both “MAP” and “MODE” switches at the same time for MA
EM
SEL527X LC
EC
FE
CL
SEL531X
MT
6. Select “Check the map CD-ROM version”.
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL532X
7. The version (parts number) of CD-ROM loaded to the NAVI

control unit will be displayed. ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL536X
SC
IDX
EL-677
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“DIAGNOSE THE DISPLAY” MODE =NJEL0520S05
Use the “Diagnose the Display” mode to check the display color
brightness and shading. The NAVI control unit must be replaced if
the color brightness and shading are abnormal.

SEL527X
5. Select “Diagnose the Display”.
SEL531X
6. Select “Display color spectrum bar” or “Display gradation bar”.

7. Then color bar/gray scale will be displayed.
SEL540X
SEL541X
EL-678
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“LONGITUDE & LATITUDE” MODE NJEL0520S06
The “Longitude & Latitude” is used to confirm the longitude and GI
latitude of some optional area point.
MA
EM
LC
1. Start the engine. EC
more than 5 seconds. FE
CL
SEL527X
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL531X
6. Select “Longitude & Latitude”.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL532X
7. Adjust the pointer with using the joystick and touch “Set”. SC
8. The longitude and latitude are displayed.
IDX
SEL537X
EL-679
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“ADJUST THE ANGLE” MODE NJEL0520S07
If the display indicates a larger or smaller turning angle than the
actual turning angle, the gyro (angular speed sensor) sensing val-
ues must be checked.
In case that the vehicle on the display makes larger angle turn than
reality, touch “−”. In case that the vehicle on the display makes
smaller angle turn than reality, touch “+”.

SEL527X
SEL531X
6. Select “Adjust the angle”.
SEL532X
7. Select “Left Turn” to adjust the angle to the left. Touch “Right
Turn” to adjust the angle to the right.
8. Select “+” to increase the angle change coefficient or “−” to
reduce the angle change coefficient.
9. Select “Set” to save the changed values in memory.
10. Then the vehicle turning angle on the display has adjusted.
SEL538X
EL-680
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“SPEED CALIBRATION” MODE NJEL0520S08
How to Perform
NJEL0520S0801
GI
3. Push both “MAP” and “MODE” switches at the same time for MA
EM
SEL527X LC
EC
FE
CL
SEL531X
MT
6. Touch “Speed Calibration”.
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL532X
7. Touch “+” or “−” to adjust the distance change coefficient.

I To make the distance change coefficient smaller, touch “−”.
ST
I To make the distance change coefficient larger, touch “+”.
8. Select “Set”. RS
BT
HA
SEL539X
SC
IDX
EL-681
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“INITIALIZE LOCATION” MODE =NJEL0520S09
This procedure is for initializing the current location. Perform “Ini-
tialize Location” when the vehicle has been transported a long dis-
tance by trailer, etc.
Map with grey background appears and the vehicle location can-
not be adjusted by scrolling the display when the vehicle location
in the memory is out of the area of the inserted map data.
Perform “Initialize Location” when this occurs.
NOTE:
I Only initialize the system when the NAVI control unit is
replaced. If the system is initialized in other cases, it may
cause inaccurate positioning of the position marker for a
while.
I Initialize the system outside for receiving the radio wave
from the GPS satellite.
1. Switch the navigation system mode to self-diagnosis by push-
ing both “MAP” and “MODE” switches at the same time for
SEL527X
3. Select “Initialize Location”. Then the previous screen is dis-

played.
SEL531X
4. Push “MAP” switch.
MAP
SEL616X
EL-682
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
5. Push “SETTING” switch.
6. Select “System Setting”.
GI
SETTING
MA
EM
SEL618X LC
7. Select “GPS Information”.
EC
FE
CL
SEL559X
MT
8. More than one GPS satellite icon turns green. (It may take 1
to 15 minutes.) AT
NOTE:
Drive the vehicle for a while* in order to change the receiving
condition of the radio wave from the GPS satellite if the GPS AX
icon does not turn green.
* The driving distance which is necessary depends on the
receiving condition of the radio wave from the GPS satellite. SU
BR
SEL146W
9. Push “MAP” switch and check the following.

I Confirm that the GPS icon on the map turns green.
ST
I Then the position marker should show the current location.
I Position marker rotates corresponding to the movement of the RS
vehicle.
10. Initialization is completed.
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-683
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Control Panel Mode
Control Panel Mode =NJEL0521

APPLICATION ITEMS NJEL0521S01
Mode Description Reference page
Display can be set to open by either of the following controls.

I Display will be opened when OPEN/CLOSE SW is selected with Key SW positioned
Display Auto Open EL-685
ACC.
I Display will be automatically opened when Key SW is turned from OFF to ACC.
The GPS data includes longitude, latitude and altitude (distance above sea level) of the
present vehicle position, and current date and time for the area in which the vehicle is
GPS Information EL-685
being driven.
Also indicated are the GPS reception conditions and the GPS satellite position.
Language can be selected for the display and voice guidance.

Language EL-686
Use the program CD-ROM disk to change the language.
Quick Stop Customer

One facility of your selection can be added to your Quick Stop. EL-686
Setting
Route Priorities Priorities of search request and automatic re-searching can be set for route search. EL-686
Tracking Tracking to the present vehicle position can be displayed. EL-687
The following display settings can be customized.

Display Setting I Display color (Day mode or Night mode) EL-687
I Brightness of display
Heading of the map display can be customized for either north heading or the actual
Heading EL-688
driving direction of the vehicle.
Icons of facilities can be displayed.

Nearby Display Icons EL-688
Facilities to be displayed can be selected from the variety selections.
Current location of position marker can be adjusted. Direction of position marker also
Adjust Current Loca-
can be calibrated when heading direction of the vehicle on the display is not matched EL-689
tion
with the actual direction.
Avoid Area Setting A particular area can be avoided when routing. —
Beep On/Off Beep sounds which corresponds to the system operation can be activated/deactivated. EL-689
Clear Memory Address book, Previous destination or Avoid area can be deleted. EL-690
When two or more countries are included in one CD-ROM disk, the destination can be
Country EL-690
selected from the country name.
HOW TO PERFORM CONTROL PANEL MODE NJEL0521S02

I For further procedures, refer to the following pages which
SETTING describe each application item of the control panel mode.
SEL618X
EL-684
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Control Panel Mode (Cont’d)
“DISPLAY AUTO OPEN” MODE NJEL0521S03
2. Push “OPEN/CLOSE” switch and then open the display. GI
4. Select “System Setting”. MA
EM
SEL619X LC
5. Select “Display Auto Open”.
EC
FE
CL
SEL620X
MT
6. Select “Auto” or “Manual” icon.
I To manually open the display, select “Manual”. AT
I To automatically open the display, select “Auto”.
7. Push “MAP” switch, then the display will go back to the current
location map. AX
SU
BR
SEL621X
“GPS INFORMATION” MODE

NJEL0521S04 ST
3. Push “SETTING” switch. RS
5. Select “GPS information”.
BT
HA
SEL559X
6. Then GPS information will be displayed. SC
IDX
SEL146W
EL-685
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“LANGUAGE” MODE =NJEL0521S05
5. Select “Language”.
SEL565X
6. Select “English” or “German” icon.

I When display indicates English, select “English”.
I When display indicates German, select “German”.
location map.
NOTE:
Use the program CD-ROM disk to change the language.
SEL566X
“QUICK STOP CUSTOMER SETTING” MODE NJEL0521S06

5. Select “Quick Stop Customer Setting”.
SEL543X
6. Select an item from the list.
SEL544X
“ROUTE PRIORITIES” MODE NJEL0521S07

5. Select “Route Priorities”.
SEL545X
EL-686
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
6. Select an item from the list.
GI
MA
EM
SEL546X LC
“TRACKING” MODE NJEL0521S08
4. Select “System Setting”. FE
5. Select “Tracking”.
CL
SEL547X
MT
6. Select “On” or “Off” icon.
I To leave no trail on the map, select “Off”. AT
I To leave a trail in the map, select “On”.
location map. AX
NOTE:
When a trail display is turned OFF, trail data is erased from the SU
memory.
BR
SEL548X
“DISPLAY SETTING” MODE NJEL0521S09 ST

Display Color Setting NJEL0521S0901
2. Push “OPEN/CLOSE” switch and then open the display. RS
BT
5. Select “Color”. Display color will change to Day mode/Night
mode.
6. Select “MAP” switch, then the display will go back to the cur- HA
rent location map.
SEL560X
NOTE:
I Display color can be changed independently when light- SC
ing switch is turned on and off.
I Initial setting of the color is as follows:
When lighting switch is turned off: Day mode
When lighting switch is turned on: Night mode
Day mode: White background
Night mode: Black background
IDX
SEL561X
EL-687
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Brightness Setting NJEL0521S0902
5. Select “Bright” or “Dark” to adjust the brightness of display.
6. Select “MAP” switch, then the display will go back to the cur-
rent location map.
NOTE:
SEL562X
Display brightness can be adjusted independently when light-
ing switch is turned on and off.
“HEADING” MODE NJEL0521S10

5. Select “Heading”.
SEL549X
6. Select “Heading up” or “North up” icon.

I To display North up, select “North up”.
I To display the car heading up, select “Heading up”.
location map.
SEL550X
“NEARBY DISPLAY ICONS” MODE NJEL0521S11

5. Select “Nearby Display Icons”.
SEL551X
EL-688
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
6. Select and touch an item on the list.
location map. GI
MA
EM
SEL552X LC
“ADJUST CURRENT LOCATION” MODE NJEL0521S12
4. Select “System Setting”. FE
5. Select “Adjust Current Location”.
CL
SEL553X
MT
6. Select “ ” or “ ” to calibrate the heading direction. (Arrow
marks will rotate corresponding to the calibration key.) AT
7. Select “Set”. Then the vehicle mark will be matched to the
arrow mark.
8. Display will show “Heading direction has been calibrated” and AX
then go back to the current location map.
SU
BR
SEL554X
“BEEP ON/OFF” MODE

NJEL0521S13 ST
2. Push “OPEN/CLOSE” switch and then open display.
3. Push “SETTING” switch. RS
5. Touch “Beep On/Off”.
BT
HA
SEL555X
6. Select “On” or “Off” icon. SC

I If you want the beep sound, select “On”.
I If you do not want the beep sound, select “Off”.
7. Push “PREVIOUS” switch, then the display will go back to the
current location map.
IDX
SEL556X
EL-689
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“CLEAR MEMORY” MODE =NJEL0521S14
5. Select “Clear Memory”.
SEL557X
6. To delete all the stored places in “Address Book”, “Avoid Area”

and “Previous Dest”, select “Yes”.
SEL558X
“COUNTRY” MODE NJEL0521S15

5. Select “Country”.
SEL567X
6. Select and touch an item on the list.
SEL653X
EL-690
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Guide Volume Setting
Guide Volume Setting =NJEL0522

DESCRIPTION
Following voice guidance setting can be changed.
NJEL0522S01
GI
I Voice guidance activation/deactivation
I Voice volume of the guidance MA
EM
LC
ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION SETTING NJEL0522S02
4. The voice prompt can be turned on/off by pressing the “Guid- FE
ance Volume” button.
CL
SEL563X
MT
VOICE VOLUME SETTING NJEL0522S03
1. Start the engine. AT
AX
4. Volume of the voice can be controlled by bending the joystick
to left/right.
SU
BR
SEL563X
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-691
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Anti-theft System
Anti-theft System =NJEL0523

DESCRIPTION NJEL0523S03
The 4-digit PIN must be entered when the display shows “enter your PIN” at the time the vehicle is purchased.
RHD Models NJEL0523S0301
By integrating the Navigation System in the vehicle’s interior and linking it to the vehicle’s immobilizer system,
the possibility of the Navigation unit being stolen is effectively reduced. Each time the Navigation System is
switched on, the Navigation System will start up communication with the vehicle’s immobilizer control unit
(IMMU) and verify an identification code. If communication cannot be established, or the verified code is
incorrect, the Navigation System will lock up showing “ANTI-THEFT FUNCTION” on the Navigation display.
EL-692
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II =NJEL0524
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
NJEL0524S01
GI
2. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector.
MA
EM
SEF094Y LC
3. Insert NVIS (NATS) program card into CONSULT-II.
: Program card
EC
NATS (AEN00A/AEN01B)
5. Touch “START”. FE
CL
PBR455D
MT
6. Select “NAVIGATION SYSTEM”.
7. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service AT
procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation
Manual, NVIS (NATS). AX
SU
BR
SEL517X
CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE FUNCTION NJEL0524S02

ST
CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST
Description
MODE
RS
PIN INITIALIZATION Navigation system will be locked when the vehicle’s owner enters the wrong PIN five con-
secutive times.
To release the lock, use “PIN INITIALIZATION”.
BT
NAVI ID INITIALIZATION In normal times regulation codes are being communicated between Navigation Control
Unit and Dongle Control Unit.
Use “NAVI ID INITIALIZATION” to match the codes when either one has been replaced HA
due to breakdown or etc.
NOTE: SC
When any initialization is performed, all NAVI ID and PIN pre-
viously registered will be erased and then must be registered
again.
IDX
EL-693
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses
Trouble Diagnoses =NJEL0525

Reference
Symptom Diagnoses/service procedure
page
Any function of the system

Check power supply and ground circuit for NAVI control unit. EL-697
does not operate.
Strange screen color or 1. Check “Display Setting” MODE. EL-687

unusual screen brightness. 2. Check display in “Diagnose the Display” MODE. EL-678
The display is not dimmed 1. Check “Display Setting” MODE. EL-687

when turning lighting switch 2. Check lighting switch signal input to NAVI control unit correctly in “Diagnosis for
to ON. EL-676
the signals from the car” MODE.
No navigation guide voice 1. Check “Guide Volume Setting”. EL-691

are heard from front driver
side speaker. 2. Check speaker relay. EL-698
Beep does not sound when

Check “Beep On/Off” MODE. EL-689
the system guides route.
Position marker does not

trace along the route being Go to “WORK FLOW FOR NAVIGATION INSPECTION”. EL-695
traveled.
Position marker does not

Check reverse signal input to NAVI control unit correctly by “Diagnosis for the sig-
indicate forward or backward EL-676
nals from the car” MODE.
movement.
1. Is there anything obstructing the GPS antenna on the rear parcel finisher?
Radio wave of GPS cannot —
(GPS antenna located under the rear parcel finisher.)
be received. (GPS marker
on the display does not 2. Check GPS radio wave receive condition in “GPS Information MODE”. EL-685
become green color.)
3. Check GPS antenna in “Self Diagnosis” MODE. EL-670
Heading direction of position 1. Perform “Adjust Current Location” MODE. EL-689

marker does not match
vehicle direction. 2. Go to “WORK FLOW FOR NAVIGATION INSPECTION”. EL-695
Stored location in the

address book and other Stored location in the address book and other memory functions may be lost if the
memory functions are lost battery is disconnected or becomes discharged. If this should occur, charge or —
when battery is disconnected replace the battery as necessary and re-enter the information.
or becomes discharged.
Map appears grey and can- The current location in the memory is out of the map data area. Perform “Initialize
EL-682
not be scrolled. Location”.
EL-694
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
WORK FLOW FOR NAVIGATION INSPECTION =NJEL0525S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL519X RS
*1: EL-700 *4: EL-676 *6: EL-671
*2: EL-669 *5: EL-696 *7: EL-674 BT
*3: EL-672
HA
SC
IDX
EL-695
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
DRIVING TEST =NJEL0525S03
During the driving test, diagnose the system by checking the dif-
ference of symptoms with each sensor ON or OFF.
Test Pattern 1 NJEL0525S0301
Test method in which current position adjustment is not made
according to GPS data.
I Remove the GPS antenna connector from the NAVI control
unit. Drive the vehicle.
Before driving the vehicle, perform “Adjust Current Location”
MODE (EL-689).
Test Pattern 2 NJEL0525S0302
Test procedure in which map matching is not used.
I Before driving the vehicle, perform “Adjust Current Location”
MODE (EL-689). With the ignition switch OFF and the map
CD-ROM removed from the NAVI control unit, drive the
vehicle. After driving the vehicle, reinstall the map CD-ROM.
Compare the saved driving tracks for the vehicle’s current loca-
tion with roads on the map.
Example NJEL0525S0303
<The position marker consistently indicates the wrong position
when driving in the same area. Determine if this is the result of the
map matching function or the GPS function.>
, Perform test pattern 1.
<To verify the accuracy of the road configuration shown on the
display>
, Perform test patterns 1 and 2.
I Compare the map and the saved driving tracks. The precision
of the saved driving tracks is within several hundred meters.
<To make distance calibration and adjustments>
, Perform test patterns 1 and 2.
I Make adjustments by driving the vehicle over a known course
(highway or other road where distances are clearly marked).
Calibrate the distance against the known distance. Use the
formula below.
Calibration value = Screen display distance/Actual distance
EL-696
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK FOR
NAVI CONTROL UNIT =NJEL0525S04
Power Supply Circuit Check GI
NJEL0525S0401
Terminal Ignition switch

MA
1 Ground Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage

EM
2 Ground Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage
5 Ground 0V 0V Battery voltage

SEL693VF LC
6 Ground 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage
If NG, check the following. EC

FE
I Harness for open or short between fuse and NAVI control unit
CL
MT
AT
3 - Ground Yes
AX
4 - Ground Yes
SU
BR
SEL694VE
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-697
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
SPEAKER RELAY CHECK =NJEL0525S05
1 CHECK RELAY ON SIGNAL

1. Push “VOICE” button.
2. Check voltage between speaker relay terminal 2 and ground.
SEL622XA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Check harness for open or short between NAVI control unit terminal 46 and speaker
relay terminal 2.
2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR SPEAKER RELAY

1. Disconnect speaker relay.
2. Check continuity between speaker relay terminal 1 and ground.
SEL623XC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
EL-698
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
3 CHECK SPEAKER RELAY

Check continuity speaker relay terminals in the condition below. GI
Terminal
1 4 8
Condition
3 4 5 6 7 8 MA
5V direct
current
Speaker relay
applied EM
between
terminal 1
and 2
2 6 3 7 5 Other than
LC
above
SEL624X EC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. FE
NG © Replace speaker relay.
CL
4 CHECK SPEAKER OPERATION
Does front LH speaker sound when audio operates?
MT
Yes or No
Yes © Check harness for open or short between speaker relay terminals 6, 7 and also between
NAVI control unit terminals 42 and 43. AT
I Speaker AX
I Harness for open or short between audio and speaker relay
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-699
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
This Condition Is Not Abnormal
This Condition Is Not Abnormal =NJEL0526

EXAMPLE OF BASIC OPERATIONAL ERRORS NJEL0526S01
No image is dis-
Monitor brightness control is set to full dark. Readjust monitor brightness.
played.
Map does not appear Map CD is not inserted or inserted upside down. Insert the map CD with the label facing up.
on display. Map mode is turned OFF. Press the “MAP” button.
No guide tone is
heard. Voice guide adjustment OFF/Volume is set to the
Adjust the voice guide level.
Voice guide volume is lowest or highest level.
too high or too low.
Dark display/Slow Wait until vehicle interior temperature rises to appro-

Low vehicle interior temperature
image movement priate level.
Small black or white

dots appear on the Unique liquid crystal display phenomena No problem
screen.
“Unable to read CD” Check map CD surface. If dirty, wipe clean with a
message appears Map CD surface is tainted/CD surface is partially soft cloth.
only during specified scratched.
operation. If map CD surface is damaged, replace the CD.
Area place names are not displayed.

If area place names do not appear on the map display, these names may not be available. Use the BIRD-
VIEWT flat surface map display function. Display output may differ. Note the items related to BIRDVIEWT
below.
I Priority is given to the display of place names in the direction of vehicle travel.
I Extended display of vehicle travel distance for both surfaces and steering angle (flat directional changes).
This phenomenon disappears after the display image has been replaced by another one.
I The names of route and area might vary between the immediate front area and distance front area.
I Alphanumeric display characters are limited to maintain display simplicity and clarity. Display details may
differ with time and place.
I Identical place and road names may appear on the display at more than one location.
EL-700
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
This Condition Is Not Abnormal (Cont’d)
EXAMPLE OF CURRENT VEHICLE POSITION MARKER ERROR =NJEL0526S02
The navigation system reads the vehicle distance and steering angle data. Because the vehicle is moving,
there will be an error in the current position indication. After the error appears, drive the vehicle for a short GI
distance. Stop the vehicle. If the position marker does not return to its original position, perform “Adjust Cur-
rent Location” MODE (EL-689).
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
SEL698V
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-701
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Possible cause Drive condition Service procedure
On wet, icy, or gravel road where

frequent wheel slippage occurs, dis-
tance calculations may be errone-
Slippery road surface
ous. The position marker may show
the vehicle to be in inaccurate posi-
tion.
Area Hilly areas where the road has
banked curves. When the vehicle
enters these banked curves, there
Slanted area may be an error in steering angle
measurement. The position marker
may show the vehicle to be in inac-
curate position.
Map display for a given road does not appear. When the vehicle is driven on a If the position marker does
newly constructed road that does not move to the correct posi-
not appear on the existing map. Map tion even after the vehicle
marking and calibration are not pos- has been driven approxi-
sible. The position marker may indi- mately 10 km (6 miles), per-
cate inaccurate position in close form “Adjust Current Loca-
proximity to the actual position. tion” MODE (EL-689). If
Subsequently, when the vehicle is necessary, perform “Speed
SEL699V driven on a road which is available
Calibration” (EL-681).
as map data, the position marker
may still indicate an inaccurate posi-
Map tion.
data
The vehicle is driven on a road whose course has
been altered (usually to improve the road or to When the map data shown on the
eliminate some hazard). display and the actual conditions are
different. Map matching will not be
possible. The position marker may
indicate inaccurate position in close
proximity to the actual position. If the
vehicle is driven on the indicated
road, further errors may occur.
SEL700V
If the position marker does

not move to the correct posi-
tion even after the vehicle
Tire chains will affect distance sens- has been driven approxi-
Vehicle Use of tire chains (Stormy weather) ing. The position marker may indi- mately 10 km (6 miles), per-
cate inaccurate position. form “Speed Calibration” (EL-
681). After removing the tire
chains, sensing accuracy
may recover by itself.
EL-702
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Possible cause Drive condition Service procedure
The gyro (angular velocity sensor) GI

needs about 15 seconds after the
engine is started to precisely sense
Wait a few moments
the angular velocity. MA
between starting the engine
Driving immediately after starting engine. Directional sensing errors will occur
and actually driving the
if the vehicle is moved immediately
vehicle.
after starting the engine. The posi-
tion marker may indicate inaccurate
EM
position.
Opera-
When the vehicle is driven continu- LC
ously without stopping over a long
tion Stop the vehicle. Perform
Continuous driving for long distances (non-stop) distance, errors in directional sens-
“Speed Calibration” (EL-681).
ing may occur. The position marker EC
may indicate inaccurate position.
If the position marker does

Wheel spinning (peeling out) or simi- not move to the correct posi- FE
lar rough driving techniques can tion even after the vehicle
Rough or violent driving adversely affect sensing accuracy. has been driven approxi-
The position marker may indicate mately 10 km (6 miles), per- CL
inaccurate position. form “Adjust Current Loca-
tion” MODE (EL-689).
Positional calibration precision

MT
Perform “Adjust Current
If current vehicle location is roughly Location” MODE (EL-689)
set, the system may be unable to within a precision standard of AT
locate the road that the vehicle is 1 mm (0.04 in) on the dis-
traveling on. (This is especially true play.
in an area where there are many NOTE:
Posi- roads.) During calibration, use the AX
tional most detailed map possible.
SEL701V
calibra-
tion Position calibration direction SU
proce-
dures When calibrating the position, check
the vehicle direction. If the vehicle Perform “Adjust Current BR
direction is not correct, subsequent Location” MODE, refer to
precision of current location will be EL-689.
affected. ST
SEL702V
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-703
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Possible cause:
Drive condition Service procedure
—: Vehicle running ---: Indication
Y-intersection
In Y-intersections with a very gradual

change in course, a directional sens-
ing may be inaccurate. This may
result in the position marker giving
the wrong road indication.
SEL703V
Spiral road
On loop bridges and similar struc-

tures which result in a large and
continuous turn, turning angle may
be sensed inaccurately. As a result,
the position marker may separate
from the route on the map.
SEL704V
Straight road
In long distance driving on a straight
road or road with very gradual
curves, map marking inaccuracies
may occur. In such cases, the posi-
tion marker may stray from the route
being traveled during subsequent If the position marker does
turns due to inaccurate distance cal- not move to the correct posi-
culation. tion even after the vehicle
SEL705V has been driven approxi-
Road
mately 10 km (6 miles), per-
shapes Winding road
form “Store place”. If
Directional sensing precision errors required, also perform
may occur when traveling on wind- “Adjust Current Location”
ing roads. During map matching, the MODE (EL-689).
position marker may stray to an
adjacent road having a similar
shape. Subsequent position marker
error may occur.
SEL706V
Grid-like road shape Directional sensing and distance

sensing, precision errors may occur
because of many roads having a
similar shape in the immediate area.
During map matching, the position
marker may stray to an adjacent
road having a similar shape. Subse-
quent position marker error may
SEL707V occur.
Parallel roads
When driving on a parallel road,

map matching errors may occur.
Subsequent position marker error
may also occur.
SEL708V
EL-704
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Possible cause:
Drive condition Service procedure
—: Vehicle running ---: Indication
GI
Parking lot or similar area When the vehicle is driven in a park-
ing lot or similar area, such as in an
area not normally marked as a road MA
on map, during map matching, the
system may select nearby roads.
This error may continue after the
vehicle exits the parking area and
EM
begins to run on ordinary roads.
Vehicle operation in a parking area If the position marker does
SEL709V
may involve frequent turns and up not move to the correct posi- LC
and/or down operation. Directional tion even after the vehicle
sensing errors may occur leading to has been driven approxi-
Loca-
subsequent route and position mis- mately 10 km (6 miles), per- EC
tion
takes. form “Store place”. If
required, also perform
Turntable When the ignition switch is OFF (the “Adjust Current Location” FE
usual situation when the vehicle is MODE (EL-689).
on a turntable), the navigation sys-
tem receives no data from the gyro
(angular velocity sensor). When the
CL
turntable rotates, no directional
change is sensed. During subse-
quent vehicle operation, directional MT
SEL710V and route errors may occur.
Position marker displays a completely different location

AT
In circumstances such as those described below, GPS signal reception conditions may result in an erroneous
position of the position marker. Perform “Adjust Current Location” MODE (EL-689). AX
NOTE:
I When GPS satellite signal reception conditions are poor, the position of position marker may be errone-
ous. If correction is not made immediately, the position marker error will be compounded and a completely SU
different location will be indicated. In an area where GPS satellite signal reception conditions are good,
the system can be returned to normal operation.
I The vehicle is driven aboard a car ferry or is towed for some distance with the ignition switch OFF. Vehicle BR
movement is not sensed. Current location calculations do not occur and current location data does not
appear on the display screen. Use GPS to accurately determine actual vehicle position. The system can
be returned to normal operation when the GPS satellite signal reception conditions are good. ST
Position marker jumps
In circumstances such as those described below, the position marker may jump as a result of automatic cur-
rent location corrections made by the system.
RS
During map matching
I During map matching, the position marker may jump from one spot to another. In this case, it may be cor- BT
rected to a wrong road or to an area where no road exist.
GPS location correcting
I Vehicle current location is sensed using the GPS data. Positional calibration is performed. The position HA
marker continues to be in the wrong position. It may jump about from one area of the screen to another.
In this case, it may be corrected to a wrong road or to an area where no road exist.
SC
Position marker indicates that the vehicle is in the middle of an ocean or large river
The navigation system does not distinguish between land and water surfaces. In some cases, a position
marker error may cause the display to show the vehicle above a water surface.
Position of position marker varies when the vehicle is repeatedly operated on the same road
Driving lane and steering wheel movement results in a variety of different positions of the position mark when
traveling on the same road based on sensing results by the GPS antenna and gyro (angular velocity sensor). IDX
Slow locational correction using map matching
I The map matching function requires verification of local data. To make the map matching function, some
distance needs to be driven.
I The map matching function may not provide accurate performance in an area where there are numerous
parallel roads. Until the system judges the road characteristics, an incorrect position may be shown.
EL-705
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
GPS signal reception conditions are good. However, the position mark does not return to its proper
position.
I The system senses the vehicle location with an error of approximately 100 m (328 ft). Due to the limita-
tion of precision, the position marker may be inaccurate even if the GPS signal reception condition is good.
I The navigation system uses GPS data to determine vehicle location. GPS data is compared with other
locational sensing data during the map matching process. The system decides which data is more pre-
cise and uses that data.
I When the vehicle is stationary, GPS data cannot be used to make system corrections.
Area designations on the map display and the BIRDVIEWT display differ.
To prevent the display from becoming congested, alphanumeric information is abridged.
[No problem]
Correct position of your vehicle is not displayed.
Vehicle position changed after ignition key was turned to the OFF position (Vehicle is transported on car ferry,
car train, or by some other means).
[Operate vehicle for short time under GPS receiving conditions.]
The display does not change to night-time mode even though the light switch has been turned ON.
Lights have been turned on. In “DISPLAY CHANGE” mode, night-time mode on display has been switched to
day-time mode and still is.
[Turn lights on again. Set the display to night-time mode. Refer to EL-687.]
Map does not scroll even though the position of your vehicle is changed.
Present area does not appear on the display.
[Press the “MAP” switch.]
Vehicle position marker does not appear.
Present area does not appear on the display.
[Press the “MAP” switch.]
The map surface precision display (GPS satellite marker) still remains gray.
Vehicle is parked inside a building or in the shadow of a large building. This intercepts the GPS signal.
[Move the vehicle to a more open position.]
GPS signal is not received because objects are placed on the rear parcel shelf.
[Remove objects from the rear parcel shelf.]
GPS satellite position is bad.
[Wait until GPS satellite position improves.]
Vehicle position precision is bad.
The map surface precision display (GPS satellite marker) still remains gray.
[Refer to “The map surface precision display (GPS satellite marker) still remains gray” item (Symptoms)]
Vehicle speed and elapsed distance is calculated from the vehicle speed pulse. This pulse is dependent upon
tire size. If tire chains are used on the vehicle, accuracy will be affected (pulse rate will be too fast or too slow).
The same is true if the system installed to your vehicle is removed and installed on another vehicle.
[Drive the vehicle at a speed higher than 30 km/h (19 MPH) for approximately 30 minutes. Automatic read-
justment should occur. If it does not (remains too fast or too slow), distance calibration is required. Or, drive
the vehicle for a short distance. Perform “SPEED CALIBRATION” (EL-681). After removing the tire chains,
sensing accuracy may recover by itself.]
Bad map data or system defect (same error consistently occurs in the same area)
ROUTE SEARCH/ROUTE GUIDE NJEL0526S03
I If the present location or the destination location is displayed in the avoid area, it is not possible to search
routes.
I If the avoid area is set to wide range area, it may not be possible to find appropriate routes or search for
alternate routes.
I The automatic re-route calculates a return to the original route. Because of this, it may not be possible to
search appropriate new routes. If you deviate from the original route and wish to select an appropriate new
route, touch “Route Calculation”.
I The automatic re-route function may sometimes require considerable time.
I Displayed route number and directional information at a highway junction may differ from the information
posted on the actual road signs.
I Displayed street name information at a highway exit may differ from the information posted on the actual
road signs.
I Street name information displayed on the enlarged intersection map may differ from the information posted
on the actual road signs.
EL-706
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
I The enlarged intersection map may display an “Unknown street” message at some street intersections.
I Because of road configuration, etc. the guide may finish early. If this occurs, follow the marker to reach
your destination. GI
I Destination area side information (left side and right side) may differ from actual conditions because of
data error.
MA
Unable to Set Destination, Way Point, and/or menu items NJEL0526S0301
Symptom Possible cause Repair order EM

Unable to search way points in A way point already crossed or determined to If you desire to pass through a way point for a
re-search mode have been crossed. second time, reperform route edit.
LC
Set designation areas and perform route
Route search does not occur.
search.
Car marker does not appear on recom- EC

Turn list is not displayed. Drive on the recommended route.
mended route.
Route guide is canceled.

Turn the route guide ON. (Push “VOICE” FE
switch)
Drive the vehicle on the search object route

Automatic search does not func- Vehicle is not running on search object route
or perform a manual route search. Note that CL
tion. (road indicated by orange, brown or red line).
all routes will be re-searched at this time.
Unable to select detour route. Vehicle is not running on recommended route.

Use the “RE-ROUTE” mode to search again MT
or return to the recommended route.
Detour route search results are All possible conditions were considered, but
identical to previous search. results are the same.
This is not abnormal. AT
More than five way points cannot be specified
More than five way points have been previ-
Unable to set a way point. at the same time. Break down into smaller AX
ously set (and not cleared).
segments and perform search.
Unable to select starting point Starting point will normally be your present
This is not abnormal. SU
during route edit. location during route edit.
Park the vehicle in a safe area and perform

Cannot select certain menu items. While vehicle is running.
operation. BR
Voice Guide Information NJEL0526S0302

ST
Voice guide is only available at certain inter-
sections (marked with ). In some cases, the
This is not abnormal.
RS
guide is not available even when the vehicle
makes a turn.
Voice guide does not function. Return to recommended route or reperform
BT
Vehicle is not running on recommended route.
route search.
Voice guide is OFF. Set voice guide to the ON position. HA

Route guide is canceled. Turn the route guide ON.
The guide content does not corre- The content of the voice guide may vary Operate vehicle following the traffic rules and SC
spond to actual conditions. depending on the type of junction. regulation.
Route Search Information NJEL0526S0303
Proceeding in desired direction.

IDX
Unable to find appropriate route in the desired
However, route search in desired This is not abnormal.
direction.
direction does not function.
EL-707
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Adjust position to wide road (brown) near des-

tination area. In an area where traffic direction
No object route is searched near destination
is displayed separately, pay close attention to
area.
No route is displayed. the direction of travel. Set the destination area
and the way point over the road.
Starting point and destination areas are very Move destination areas away from starting
near. point on the screen.
The recommended route is divided into indi-

Recommended route which has
vidual control segments. When way point 1 is
been passed disappears from the This is not abnormal.
passed, the data from the starting point to the
display.
way point 1 is erased.
There may be special conditions for roads

Search recommends roundabout near the starting point and destination area Slightly change starting point and destination
route. (one-way traffic, etc.). A roundabout route may area settings.
be displayed.
Landmark display does not show Mistaken or missing map data may result in
Change map CD.
actual conditions. erroneous display.
Course search data may not exist for closely Set the destination area to the general route
Recommended route drawn positioned starting point, way points, and des- (indicated by a thick brown line). However,
slightly away from starting point, tination area shown on the map. Route guide even if the selected route is a major one,
way points, and destination area. starting point, way point, and destination point appropriate route search data may not be
may be separated. available.
LOCATION OF CAR MARKER NJEL0526S04

I If the vehicle has been parked in a multi-level parking facility or underground parking facility, the car marker
position may be inaccurate immediately after exiting the parking facility.
I The GPS accuracy is within ±100 m (300 ft). Even when receiving conditions are excellent, further posi-
tional correction may not occur.
STREET INDICATION NJEL0526S05
I Street names displayed on the map may differ from the actual street names.
I An “Unknown street” message may appear on the map in place of street name information.
RESEARCH NJEL0526S06
I Position may be searched by house number. However, the displayed position and street may differ from
the actual position and street.
I When position is searched using POI, the displayed position may differ from the actual position.
I Some data may not be available for new buildings and other structures in a map.
GPS ANTENNA NJEL0526S07
I Do not place metal objects above the GPS antenna mounted on the rear parcel shelf. This will cause
interference with signal reception.
I Do not place mobile telephones or vehicle radio transceivers in close proximity to the GPS antenna
mounted on the rear parcel shelf. This may cause interference with signal reception.
EL-708
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Program Loading
Program Loading NJEL0527
GI
Power supply ON
Insert CD-ROM MA
with designated program.
EM
LC
EC
FE
Push for changing version.
CL
MT
No
AT
AX
* Display of program content

Yes SU
BR
* Program loading progress is shown on the bar graph ST

at the center of the screen.
RS
BT
HA
SC
Map CD-ROM insertion
Position marker screen display
IDX
Note: Load the program only after the engine has been started. SEL564X
EL-709
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Engine Compartment
Engine Compartment NJEL0129
HEL681B
EL-710
Engine Compartment (Cont’d)
NOTE:
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-711
Passenger Compartment/LHD Models
Passenger Compartment/LHD Models NJEL0130
HEL117B
EL-712
Passenger Compartment/LHD Models (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL506B
EL-713
Passenger Compartment/RHD Models
Passenger Compartment/RHD Models NJEL0345
HEL507B
EL-714
Passenger Compartment/RHD Models (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL508B
EL-715
HARNESS LAYOUT
How to Read Harness Layout
How to Read Harness Layout NJEL0131
SEL252V
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
I Main Harness
I Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment)
I Engine Control Harness
I Body Harness
TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE NJEL0131S01
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list.
2. Find the grid reference.
3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row.
4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone.
5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
CONNECTOR SYMBOL NJEL0131S02
Main symbols of connector (in Harness Layout) are indicated in the below.
Water proof type Standard type
Connector type
Male Female Male Female
I Cavity: Less than 4

I Relay connector
I Cavity: From 5 to 8
I Cavity: More than 9
I Ground terminal etc.

—
EL-716
HARNESS LAYOUT
Outline/Sedan
Outline/Sedan NJEL0132
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
HEL954A
SU
NOTE:
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to “Ground Distribution”, “GROUND”, EL-41.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-717
HARNESS LAYOUT
Outline/Sedan (Cont’d)
HEL955A
NOTE:
EL-718
HARNESS LAYOUT
Outline/Hatchback
Outline/Hatchback NJEL0491
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
MEL177M
SU
NOTE:
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-719
HARNESS LAYOUT
Outline/Hatchback (Cont’d)
MEL178M
NOTE:
EL-720
HARNESS LAYOUT
Outline/Hatchback (Cont’d)
NOTE:
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-721
HARNESS LAYOUT
Main Harness/Except for Europe
Main Harness/Except for Europe NJEL0133

HEL819B
EL-722
HARNESS LAYOUT
Main Harness/Except for Europe (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL910B
EL-723
HARNESS LAYOUT
HEL821B
EL-724
HARNESS LAYOUT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL822B
EL-725
HARNESS LAYOUT
Main Harness/Sedan for Europe
Main Harness/Sedan for Europe NJEL0507

HEL322B
EL-726
HARNESS LAYOUT
Main Harness/Sedan for Europe (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL670B
EL-727
HARNESS LAYOUT
HEL324B
EL-728
HARNESS LAYOUT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL671B
EL-729
HARNESS LAYOUT
Main Harness/Hatchback
Main Harness/Hatchback NJEL0347

HEL682B
EL-730
HARNESS LAYOUT
Main Harness/Hatchback (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL683B
EL-731
HARNESS LAYOUT
HEL684B
EL-732
HARNESS LAYOUT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL685B
EL-733
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Room Harness/Sedan
Engine Room Harness/Sedan NJEL0134

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — LHD MODELS NJEL0134S01
HEL326B
EL-734
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Room Harness/Sedan (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL823B
EL-735
HARNESS LAYOUT
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — RHD MODELS NJEL0134S03
HEL513B
EL-736
HARNESS LAYOUT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL824B
EL-737
HARNESS LAYOUT
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT — LHD MODELS NJEL0134S02
HEL825B
EL-738
HARNESS LAYOUT
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT — RHD MODELS NJEL0134S04
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL826B
EL-739
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Room Harness/Hatchback
Engine Room Harness/Hatchback NJEL0342

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — LHD MODEL NJEL0342S01
HEL688B
EL-740
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Room Harness/Hatchback (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL689B
EL-741
HARNESS LAYOUT
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — RHD MODEL NJEL0342S03
HEL690B
EL-742
HARNESS LAYOUT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL691B
EL-743
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness/QG Engine Models
Engine Control Harness/QG Engine Models NJEL0135

HEL827B
EL-744
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness/QG Engine Models (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL828B
EL-745
HARNESS LAYOUT
HEL829B
EL-746
HARNESS LAYOUT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL830B
EL-747
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness/QG13 M/T Models with Catalyst Converter for the Middle East (Up to 2002 Model Year)
Engine Control Harness/QG13 M/T Models with

Catalyst Converter for the Middle East (Up to
2002 Model Year) NJEL0535
HEL837B
EL-748
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness/QG13 M/T Models with Catalyst Converter for the Middle East (Up to 2002 Model Year) (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL838B
EL-749
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness/QG13 Engine Models with Catalyst Converter for the Middle East (From 2003 Model Year)
Engine Control Harness/QG13 Engine Models

with Catalyst Converter for the Middle East
(From 2003 Model Year) NJEL0537
HEL911B
EL-750
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness/QG13 Engine Models with Catalyst Converter for the Middle East (From 2003 Model Year) (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL912B
EL-751
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness/YD Engine Models
Engine Control Harness/YD Engine Models NJEL0343

HEL333B
EL-752
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness/YD Engine Models (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL697B
EL-753
HARNESS LAYOUT
HEL335B
EL-754
HARNESS LAYOUT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL699B
EL-755
HARNESS LAYOUT
Body Harness/Sedan
Body Harness/Sedan NJEL0136

INTERIOR ROOM SIDE — LHD MODELS NJEL0136S01
HEL831B
EL-756
HARNESS LAYOUT
Body Harness/Sedan (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL832B
EL-757
HARNESS LAYOUT
TRUNK ROOM SIDE — LHD MODELS NJEL0136S03
HEL340B
EL-758
HARNESS LAYOUT
NOTE:
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-759
HARNESS LAYOUT
INTERIOR ROOM SIDE — RHD MODELS NJEL0136S04
HEL833B
EL-760
HARNESS LAYOUT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
HEL834B
EL-761
HARNESS LAYOUT
TRUNK ROOM SIDE — RHD MODELS NJEL0136S06
HEL341B
EL-762
HARNESS LAYOUT
NOTE:
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-763
HARNESS LAYOUT
Body Harness/Hatchback
Body Harness/Hatchback NJEL0348

MEL179M
EL-764
HARNESS LAYOUT
Body Harness/Hatchback (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL180M
EL-765
HARNESS LAYOUT
MEL181M
EL-766
HARNESS LAYOUT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL182M
EL-767
HARNESS LAYOUT
Room Lamp Harness
Room Lamp Harness NJEL0140
HEL342B
EL-768
HARNESS LAYOUT
Front Door Harness/LHD Models
Front Door Harness/LHD Models NJEL0142

LH SIDE (EXCEPT FOR EUROPE) NJEL0142S05
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
HEL979A
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-769
HARNESS LAYOUT
Front Door Harness/LHD Models (Cont’d)
LH SIDE (FOR EUROPE) NJEL0142S07
HEL343B
EL-770
HARNESS LAYOUT
Front Door Harness/LHD Models (Cont’d)
RH SIDE NJEL0142S06
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
HEL345B
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-771
HARNESS LAYOUT
Front Door Harness/RHD Models
Front Door Harness/RHD Models NJEL0349

LH SIDE NJEL0349S01
HEL344B
EL-772
HARNESS LAYOUT
Front Door Harness/RHD Models (Cont’d)
RH SIDE (EXCEPT FOR EUROPE) NJEL0349S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
HEL515B
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-773
HARNESS LAYOUT
Front Door Harness/RHD Models (Cont’d)
RH SIDE (FOR EUROPE) NJEL0349S03
HEL346B
EL-774
HARNESS LAYOUT
Rear Door Harness/Except for Europe
Rear Door Harness/Except for Europe NJEL0143

LH SIDE NJEL0143S03
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
HEL983A
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-775
HARNESS LAYOUT
Rear Door Harness/Except for Europe (Cont’d)
RH SIDE NJEL0143S04
HEL984A
EL-776
HARNESS LAYOUT
Rear Door Harness/For Europe
Rear Door Harness/For Europe NJEL0416

LH SIDE NJEL0416S01
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
HEL347B
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-777
HARNESS LAYOUT
Rear Door Harness/For Europe (Cont’d)
RH SIDE NJEL0416S02
HEL348B
EL-778
HARNESS LAYOUT
Back Door Harness
Back Door Harness NJEL0492
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL183M
EL-779
NJEL0144
BULB SPECIFICATIONS
Headlamp
Headlamp NJEL0144S03
Item Wattage (W)
2-bulbs type 60/55 (H4)

High/Low (Semi-sealed beam)
4-bulbs type 55 (H1)/55 (*1)
*1 H1LL ... RHD models except for Europe, H7 ... RHD models for Europe and LHD models
Exterior Lamp NJEL0144S01
Item Wattage (W)
Front fog lamp 55 (H3)
Front turn signal lamp 21
Side turn signal lamp 5
Parking lamp 5
Front side marker lamp 3.8
Turn signal 21
Stop/Tail 21/5
Rear combination lamp
Back-up 18
Rear fog lamp 21
Rear side marker lamp 3.8
License lamp 5
On the rear parcel shelf 18

High-mounted stop lamp
In the air spoiler (LED) 3.2
Interior Lamp NJEL0144S02
Item Wattage (W)
Interior room lamp 10
With roof console 3

Map lamp
Without roof console 8
Vanity mirror lamp 8
Personal lamp 5
Trunk room lamp 3.4
EL-780
NJEL0311
WIRING DIAGRAM CODES (CELL CODES)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring

Code Section Wiring Diagram Name
diagram code stands for.
Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical EGRC/V EC EGRC-solenoid Valve GI
index to find the location (page number) of each
wiring diagram. EGRC1 EC EGR Function
Code Section Wiring Diagram Name

EGVC/V EC EGR Volume Control Valve MA
ENGSS AT Engine Speed Signal
1STSIG AT A/T 1ST Signal
F/FOG EL Front Fog Lamp EM
2NDSIG AT A/T 2ND Signal
F/PUMP EC Fuel Pump
3RDSIG AT A/T 3RD Signal
FRO2 EC Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Non LC
4THSIG AT A/T 4TH Signal
E-OBD)
A/C, A HA Auto Air Conditioner
FRO2/H EC Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater EC
A/C, M HA Manual Air Conditioner (Non E-OBD)
A/CCUT EC Air Conditioner Cut Control FTS AT A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor
FE
AAC/V EC IACV-AAC Valve FTTS EC Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor
ABS BR Anti-lock Brake System FUEL EC Fuel Injection System Function

CL
ACC/SW EC Accelerator Switch (FC) GLOW EC Glow Control System
ACL/SW EC Accelerator Position Switch H/AIM EL Headlamp Aiming Control System MT

APS EC Accelerator Position Sensor H/LAMP EL Headlamp
AT/C EC A/T Control H/SEAT EL Heated Seat AT

AT/IND EL A/T Indicator Lamp HEATER HA Heater System
ATDIAG EC A/T Diagnosis Communication Line HLC EL Headlamp Washer AX

AUDIO EL Audio HORN EL Horn
BA/FTS AT A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor and IATS EC Intake Air Temperature Sensor SU
TCM Power Supply
IGN/SG EC Ignition Signal
BACK/L EL Back-up Lamp
ILL EL Illumination BR
BRK/SW EC Brake Pedal Position Switch
INJECT EC Injector
CHARGE SC Charging System
INJPMP EC Injection Pump
ST
CHIME EL Warning Chime
INT/L EL Spot, Vanity Mirror, Personal and
CIGAR EL Cigarette Lighter Trunk Room Lamps RS
CKPS EC Crankshaft Position Sensor (TDC) IVC EC Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid
Valve
CLOCK EL Clock BT
KS EC Knock Sensor
CO/VOL EC CO Adjustment Resistor
LOAD EC Load Signal
COOL/F EC Cooling Fan Control HA
LPSV AT Line Pressure Solenoid Valve
D/LOCK EL Power Door Lock
DEF EL Rear Window Defogger

MAFS EC Mass Air Flow Sensor SC
MAIN AT Main Power Supply and Ground Cir-
DP/SEN EC Refrigerant Pressure Sensor cuit
DTRL EL Headlamp — With Daytime Light MAIN EC Main Power Supply and Ground Cir-
System cuit
ECMRLY EC ECM Relay METER EL Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. IDX
and Fuel Gauges
ECTS EC Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
MIL/DL EC MIL and Data Link Connectors
EGR/TS EC EGR Temperature Sensor
MIRROR EL Door Mirror
EL-781
WIRING DIAGRAM CODES (CELL CODES)
Code Section Wiring Diagram Name Code Section Wiring Diagram Name
MULTI EL Multi-remote Control System TCV AT Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid

Valve
NATS EL Nissan Anti-Theft System
THEFT EL Theft Warning System
NAVI EL Navigation System
TLID EL Trunk Lid Opener
NONDTC AT Non-detectable Items
TP/SW EC Throttle Position Switch
O2H1B1 EC Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater
(E-OBD) TPS AT Throttle Position Sensor
O2H2B1 EC Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater TPS EC Throttle Position Sensor
(E-OBD)
TURN EL Turn Signal and Hazard Warning
O2S1B1 EC Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Lamps
(E-OBD)
VSS EC Vehicle Speed Sensor
O2S2B1 EC Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor
(E-OBD) VSSA/T AT Vehicle Speed Sensor A/T (Revolu-
tion Sensor)
OVRCSV AT Overrun Clutch Solenoid Valve
VSSMTR AT Vehicle Speed Sensor MTR
P/ANT EL Power Antenna
WARN EL Warning Lamps
PGC/V EC EVAP Canister Purge Volume Con-
trol Solenoid Valve WINDOW EL Power Window
PHASE EC Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) WIP/R EL Rear Wiper and Washer
PNP/SW EC Park/Neutral Position Switch WIPER EL Front Wiper and Washer
PNP/SW AT Park/Neutral Position Switch
POS EC Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS)
POWER EL Power Supply Routing
PST/SW EC Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch
R/FOG EL Rear Fog Lamp
ROOM/L EL Interior Room Lamp
RRO2 EC Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Non

E-OBD)
RRO2/H EC Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater

(Non E-OBD)
S/SIG EC Start Signal
SHIFT AT A/T Shift Lock System
S/LOCK EL Power Door Lock — Super Lock —
SROOF EL Sunroof
SRS RS Supplemental Restraint System
SSV/A AT Shift Solenoid Valve A
SSV/B AT Shift Solenoid Valve B
START SC Starting System
STOP/L EL Stop Lamp
SWL/C EC Swirl Control Valve Control Solenoid

Valve (Non E-OBD)
SWL/V EC Swirl Control Valve Control Solenoid

Valve (E-OBD)
TAIL/L EL Parking, License and Tail Lamps
EL-782

El PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

El PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

El PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM GI

PRECAUTIONS ...............................................................6 Trouble Diagnoses.....................................................83

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR

TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS NJEL0004S02

1T 1 Transfer 1M·1B 1 Make 1 Break AX

Wiring Diagram — POWER —/Sedan With

Wiring Diagram — POWER —/Sedan With

Wiring Diagram — POWER —/Hatchback NJEL0419

FUSIBLE LINK NJEL0007S02

CIRCUIT BREAKER NJEL0007S03

CIRCUIT BREAKER (PTC THERMISTOR TYPE) NJEL0007S04

Ground Distribution NJEL0008

I To remove combination switch base, remove base attaching

I Before installing the steering wheel, align the steering wheel

Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —/Sedan Except for

Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —/Hatchback NJEL0420

Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —/Sedan for

Trouble Diagnoses NJEL0202

Symptom Possible cause Repair order

Neither headlamp operates. 1. Lighting switch 1. Check Lighting switch.

LH high beam does not operate, 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

LH low beam does not operate, but 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

RH high beam does not operate, 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

RH low beam does not operate, 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

Bulb Replacement NJEL0015

Aiming Adjustment NJEL0016

LOW BEAM NJEL0016S02

System Description NJEL0351

Wiring Diagram — DTRL —/Sedan NJEL0353

Wiring Diagram — DTRL —/Hatchback NJEL0422

Trouble Diagnoses NJEL0354

ON (daytime light operating*) 12 EC

ON (daytime light operating*) 12 FE

ON (daytime light operating*) 12

Bulb Replacement NJEL0355

Aiming Adjustment NJEL0356

Wiring Diagram — H/AIM —/Sedan for Europe NJEL0357

Wiring Diagram — H/AIM —/For China and

Wiring Diagram — H/AIM —/Hatchback NJEL0424

Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L —/Except for Europe NJEL0024

Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L —/Sedan for Europe NJEL0359

Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L —/Hatchback NJEL0425

Wiring Diagram — STOP/L —/Sedan NJEL0025

Wiring Diagram — STOP/L —/Hatchback NJEL0426

Wiring Diagram — BACK/L —/Except for

Wiring Diagram — BACK/L —/Sedan for

Wiring Diagram — BACK/L —/Hatchback NJEL0427

Wiring Diagram — F/FOG —/Except for Europe,

Wiring Diagram — F/FOG —/Sedan for Europe,

Wiring Diagram — F/FOG —/Hatchback NJEL0428

Bulb Replacement NJEL0314

Aiming Adjustment =NJEL0029

Wiring Diagram — R/FOG —/Sedan NJEL0362

Wiring Diagram — R/FOG —/Hatchback NJEL0429

System Description/Sedan NJEL0030

Wiring Diagram — TURN —/Sedan Except for

Wiring Diagram — TURN —/Sedan for Europe NJEL0364

Trouble Diagnoses/Sedan NJEL0033

Symptom Possible cause Repair order GI